• Share
  • Email
  • Embed
  • Like
  • Save
  • Private Content
2010 FRONTIER OWNER'S MANUAL
 

2010 FRONTIER OWNER'S MANUAL

on

  • 769 views

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a Nissan 2010 FRONTIER or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New Jersey ...

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a Nissan 2010 FRONTIER or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New Jersey between Cherry Hill and Mount Holly. Only 20 minutes from Philadelphia. Classic Cars Nissan 1513 Route 38 Hainesport, NJ 08036 866-CLASSIC or 866-252-7742

Statistics

Views

Total Views
769
Views on SlideShare
769
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
0
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    2010 FRONTIER OWNER'S MANUAL 2010 FRONTIER OWNER'S MANUAL Presentation Transcript

    • 2010 FRONTIER OWNERS MANUALFor your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
    • FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELYWelcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle, please read this For descriptions specified for four-wheel driveowners. This vehicle is delivered to you with Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil- models, a mark is placed at the begin-confidence. It was produced using the latest iarity with controls and maintenance require- ning of the applicable sections/items.techniques and strict quality control. ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. As with other vehicles with features forThis manual was prepared to help you under- off-road use, failure to operate four-wheelstand the operation and maintenance of your drive models correctly may result in loss of WARNINGvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- control or an accident. Be sure to readters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- “Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-manual before operating your vehicle. MINDERS FOR SAFETY! ing and driving” section of this manual.A separate Warranty Information Booklet Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service for you and your passengers! This vehicle will handle and maneuverand Maintenance Guide” explains details ● NEVER drive under the influence of al- differently from an ordinary passengerabout maintaining and servicing your ve- cohol or drugs. car because it has a higher center ofhicle. Additionally, a separate Customer gravity for off-road use. As with otherCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits vehicles with features of this type, fail-explain how to resolve any concerns you and never drive too fast for conditions. ure to operate this vehicle correctly maymay have with your vehicle, as well as ● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingclarify your rights under your state’s lemon result in loss of control or an accident. and avoid using vehicle features or takinglaw. other actions that could distract you. Be sure to read “On-pavement and off- road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-best. When you require any service or have any ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenquestions, they will be glad to assist you with the safety precautions”, in the “Starting and children should be seated in the rear seat.extensive resources available to them. driving” section of this manual. ● ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.
    • WHEN READING THE MANUALMODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may findThis vehicle should not be modified. some information that does not apply to yourModification could affect its vehicle.performance, safety or durability, and All information, specifications and illustrations inmay even violate governmental this manual are those in effect at the time ofregulations. In addition, damage or per- printing. NISSAN reserves the right to changeformance problems resulting from modi- specifications or design without notice and with-fications may not be covered under out obligation.NISSAN warranties. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: APD1005 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” WARNING or “Do not let this happen.” This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- risk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the precisely. vehicle. CAUTION Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these This is used to indicate the presence of a indicate movement or action. hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.
    • CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEWARNING ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter- WARNING ies, may contain perchlorate material. TheEngine exhaust, some of its constituents, following advisory is provided: “Perchlorateand certain vehicle components contain Material – special handling may apply, Seeor emit chemicals known to the State of www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”California to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- BLUETOOTH௡ is ation, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wear trademark owned bycontain or emit chemicals known to the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,State of California to cause cancer and U.S.A. and licensed tobirth defects or other reproductive harm. Visteon. XM Radio௡ requires subscription, sold separately after first 90 days. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more © 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. information, visit All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s www.xmradio.com. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
    • NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAMNISSAN CARES . . .Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information: For U.S. customersprovide NISSAN directly with comments or – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- – Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Departmentsumer Affairs Department using our toll-free top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 685003number: side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003For U.S. customers – Date of purchase For Canadian customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 Nissan Canada Inc. (1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading 5290 Orbitor DriveFor Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer’s name Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 1-800-387-0122 – Your comments or questions OR We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
    • Table of Illustrated table of contents 0Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8 Technical and consumer information 9 Index 10
    • 0 Illustrated table of contentsAir bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
    • AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS 1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-16) 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 3. Front seat belts (P. 1-16) 4. Head restraints (P.1-6) 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-65) 6. Seats (P. 1-2) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) (P. 1-65) 8. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-70) 9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-28) 11. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-30) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WII01350-2 Illustrated table of contents
    • EXTERIOR FRONT 1. Engine hood (P. 8-6) 2. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P. 2-25) 3. Windshield (P. 8-22) 4. Windows (P. 2-45) 5. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped), keys (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-13) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32) 8. Flat tire (P. 6-3) 9. Tire chains (P. 8-39) 10. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-26); Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) 11. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. LII0052 Illustrated table of contents 0-3
    • EXTERIOR REAR 1. Rear sliding window (if so equipped) (P.2-48) 2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13) 3. Truck box, tailgate (P. 3-15) 4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) 5. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-10, P. 9-4) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. LII00530-4 Illustrated table of contents
    • PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-50) 2. Sun visors (P. 3-12) 3. Rearview mirror (if so equipped) (P. 3-13) 4. Vents (P. 4-2) 5. Glove box (P. 2-40) 6. Shift selector (automatic transmission, if so equipped) (P. 5-13) 7. Cup holders (P. 2-42) 8. Front seats (P. 1-2) 9. Console box (P. 2-39) 10. Rear seats (P. 1-15) 11. Flat tire/Jacking equipment storage (P. 6-3) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WII0054 Illustrated table of contents 0-5
    • INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Vents (P. 4-2) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-26) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands- Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-35, P. 4-37) 4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-57, P. 2-31) 5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights (P. 2-3, 2-13) 6. Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-20) 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-25) 8. Storage (P. 2-36) 9. Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-17) 10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40) 12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-66) 13. Auxiliary audio input jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-34) 14. Power outlet (P. 2-35) LIC14220-6 Illustrated table of contents
    • 15. Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32) Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-33) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)16. Shift selector (P. 5-13,5-17 )17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-22)18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P.4-10)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)21. Tilt steering wheel control (if so equipped) (P. 3-12)22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-31)23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)24. Outside mirror controls (if so equipped) (P. 3-15) Illustrated table of contents 0-7
    • ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS QR25DE engine 1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) 2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) 3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24) 4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9) 6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9) 7. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 8. Drive belt location (P.8-18) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 11. Battery (P. 8-15) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. WDI06430-8 Illustrated table of contents
    • VQ40DE engine 1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) 2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) 3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24) 4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9) 5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9) 6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20) 8. Drive belt location (P.8-18) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 11. Battery (P. 8-15) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.LII0167 Illustrated table of contents 0-9
    • WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light Anti-lock Braking 2-14 Engine oil pressure 2-15 Automatic transmis- 2-18 System (ABS) warn- warning light sion position indica- or ing light tor light (if so 4WD warning light 2-16 equipped) ( model) Automatic transmis- 2-14 Cruise main switch 2-18 Low fuel warning 2-16 indicator light (if so sion oil temperature light warning light (if so equipped) equipped) Low tire pressure 2-16 Cruise set switch 2-19 warning light indicator light (if so Automatic transmis- 2-14 sion park warning equipped) Low windshield 2-18 light ( washer fluid warning Electronic locking 2-19 model) light rear differential (E- Brake warning light 2-15 Lock) system on Seat belt warning 2-18 indicator light (if so or light and chime equipped) Supplemental air 2-18 4WD shift indicator 2-19 bag warning light light ( Charge warning 2-15 model) light Front passenger air 2-19 Door open warning 2-15 bag status light light0-10 Illustrated table of contents
    • Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page light light High beam indicator 2-19 Transfer 4LO posi- 2-21 light (Blue) tion indicator light ( model) Hill descent control 2-33 system on indicator Turn signal/hazard 2-21 light (if so equipped) indicator lights Malfunction Indica- 2-20 Vehicle Dynamic 2-22 tor Light (MIL) Control (VDC) OFF indicator light (if so Overdrive off indica- 2-20 equipped) tor light (A/T models only) Security indicator 2-20 light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light 2-21 for models with ABLS (if so equipped) Slip indicator light 2-21 for models with VDC (if so equipped) Illustrated table of contents 0-11
    • 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint systemSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Front manual seat adjustment CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Rear-facing child restraint installation using Front power seat adjustment LATCH (Crew cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Rear-facing child restraint installation using Jump seat (King cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 the seat belts — (Crew cab models only). . . . . . . . . 1-33 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 the seat belts — passenger’s side jump seat Adjustable headrest (Crew cab models only) (King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Forward-facing child restraint installation Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 using LATCH (Crew cab model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Forward-facing child restraint installation Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 using the seat belts — front passenger and rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Foward-facing child restraint installation Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 using the seat belts — front passenger and Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 passenger’s side jump seat Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 (King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Installing top tether strap (Front passengerChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 seat – King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Installing top tether strap (Passenger’s side Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 jump seat – King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Installing top tether strap (Rear bench seat –Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Crew cab models only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
    • Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Precautions on supplemental restraint Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
    • SEATS ● The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the pas- senger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. ARS1152 FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) WARNING ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the the seatback is reclined. This can be seat with both feet on the floor and dangerous. The shoulder belt will not adjust the seat properly. See “Precau- be against your body. In an accident, tions on seat belt usage” later in this you could be thrown into it and receive section. neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked. ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sPull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean seat)seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofRelease the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever the seat cushion to the desired position. to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
    • The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be re- clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. WRS0163FRONT POWER SEAT ● Do not operate the power seat switch for aADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.Operating tips Forward and backward ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset Moving the switch forward or backward will slide overload protection circuit. If the motor the seat forward or backward to the desired stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, position. then reactivate the switch. Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WRS0164 WRS0389 LRS0556Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s Lumbar support (if so equipped for JUMP SEAT (King cab)seat) driver’s seat) WARNINGPush the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower backdown to adjust the angle and height of the seat support to the driver. Move the lever forward or ● Do not use a child restraint in the driv-cushion. backward to adjust the seat lumbar area. er’s side jump seat. This seating posi- tion is not suitable for child restraint installation. A child restraint can be in- stalled in the passenger’s side jump seat when the seat extension is un- folded from the seat base. ● When folding the jump seat, be careful not to squeeze your finger between the seat cushion and the body side. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
    • HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve- hicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in cer- tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re- LRS0557 moved. If the head restraint was removed, LRS0904 reinstall and properly adjust the head re-ARMREST straint before an occupant uses the seat- The illustration shows the seating positions ing position. Failure to follow these in- equipped with head restraints. All of the headTo use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench restraints are adjustable. structions can reduce the effectiveness ofseat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and the head restraints. This may increase thefold it down to the resting position. ᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with risk of serious injury or death in a a head restraint. collision.1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint, pull it up.1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.2. Adjustment notches3. Lock knob4. Stalks Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
    • LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal Installthe head restraint down. Use the following procedure to remove the ad- 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes justable head restraints. in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with 1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest the adjustment notches ᭺ must be installed 1 position. in the hole with the lock button ᭺. 2 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the 3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. head restraint down. 4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not 3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an loose in the vehicle. occupant uses the seating position. 5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating posi- tion.1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section. ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (Crew cab models only) (if so equipped) WARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against in- jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrests properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach SPA1025 anything to the adjustable headrest stalks LRS0905Front-seat Active Head Restraints or remove the adjustable headrests. Do The illustration shows the seating positions not use the seat if the adjustable head- equipped with adjustable headrests. All of theThe Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- rests have been removed. If the headrest headrests are adjustable.ing the force that the seatback receives from the was removed, reinstall and properly adjustoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movement Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped with the headrest before an occupant uses theof the head restraint helps support the occu- an adjustable headrest. seating position. Failure to follow thesepant’s head by reducing its backward movement instructions can reduce the effectiveness + Indicates the seating position is not equippedand helping absorb some of the forces that may of the adjustable headrests. This may in- with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.lead to whiplash-type injuries. crease the risk of serious injury or death inActive Head Restraints are effective for collisions a collision.at low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
    • LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888Components Adjustment To raise the headrest, pull it up. 1. Adjustable headrest Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant’s ears. 2. Adjustment notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal Installthe headrest down. Use the following procedure to remove the ad- 1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in justable headrests. the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad- 1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position. justment notches ᭺ must be installed in the 1 2. Push and hold the lock knob. hole with the lock button ᭺. 2 3. Remove the headrest from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down. 4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle. 3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc- cupant uses the seating position. 5. Install and properly adjust the headrest be- fore an occupant uses the seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
    • FLEXIBLE SEATING ● If the head restraints are removed for any reason, they should be securely WARNING stored to prevent them from causing● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo injury to passengers or damage to the area or on the rear seats when they are vehicle in case of sudden braking or an in the fold-down position. In a collision, accident. people riding in these areas without ● When returning the seatbacks to the proper restraints are more likely to be upright position, be certain they are seriously injured or killed. completely secured in the latched posi-● Do not allow people to ride in any area tion. If they are not completely secured, of your vehicle that is not equipped with passengers may be injured in an acci- seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone dent or sudden stop. in your vehicle is in a seat and using a ● Properly secure all cargo to help pre- seat belt properly. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not LRS0608● Do not fold down the rear seats when place cargo higher than the seatbacks. Folding the front passenger’s seatback In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured occupants are in the rear seat area or cargo could cause personal injury. (if so equipped) any luggage is on the rear seats. To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for● Head restraints should be adjusted extra storage length when transporting long properly as they may provide significant items: protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them prop- ᭺ 1 Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift erly if they have been removed for any up on the recline lever, located on the out- reason. side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat.1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING ● If you fold the front passenger’s seat- back flat forward to carry longer ob- jects, be sure this cargo is properly se- cured and not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Se- cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate. See “Precautions on supplemental restraint system” later in this section. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo LRS0609 area or on the front passenger’s seat LRS0398᭺2 Once the seatback is released, it will enable when it is in the fold-down position. Use Folding the rear bench seat you to fold the front passenger seatback flat of these areas by passengers could re- over the seat cushion. sult in serious injury in an accident or To fold the rear bench seat up: sudden stop.3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a ᭺ 1 Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion seating position, lift up on the seatback and up. push it up to an upright position. Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to a proper seating position. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
    • WARNING ● When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo, properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear LRS0566 LRS0567 seat unless the seat bottom cushions᭺2 Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward ᭺ 3 Repeat this process to raise and secure the are in place and latched. the back of the vehicle until it locks in place. seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle ● When returning the seatbacks to the for maximum storage capacity. upright position, be certain they are To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi- completely secured in the latched posi- tion, reverse the process. Make sure to prop- tion. If they are not completely secured, erly push the seat cushion down into place. passengers may be injured in an acci- dent or sudden stop.1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop. WRS0840Folding the rear bench seat downThe rear bench seatback can be tilted forward toaccess the child restraint anchor point locationsor the jacking equipment.To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up ᭺ 1and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchorpoints ᭺ can be accessed behind the rear 2bench seatback. The jacking equipment can beaccessed from behind the passenger’s sideseatback. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
    • SEAT BELTS SSS0136PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • SSS0134 SSS0016 WARNING WARNING● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad- vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
    • ● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti- fastened to the proper buckle. vated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. ● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or See your NISSAN dealer. twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. ● Removal and installation of preten- sioner system components should be ● Do not allow more than one person to done by a NISSAN dealer. use the same seat belt. ● All seat belt assemblies, including re- ● Never carry more people in the vehicle tractors and attaching hardware, than there are seat belts. should be inspected after any collision ● If the seat belt warning light glows con- by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- tinuously while the ignition is turned mends that all seat belt assemblies in ON with all doors closed and all seat use during a collision be replaced un- SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- less the collision was minor and the function in the system. Have the system belts show no damage and continue to WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. operate properly. Seat belt assemblies● Always route the shoulder belt over ● No changes should be made to the seat not in use during a collision should also your shoulder and across your chest. belt system. For example, do not modify be inspected and replaced if either Never put the belt behind your back, the seat belt, add material, or install damage or improper operation is noted. under your arm or across your neck. The devices that may change the seat belt ● All child restraints and attaching hard- belt should be away from your face and routing or tension. Doing so may affect ware should be inspected after any col- neck, but not falling off your shoulder. the operation of the seat belt system. lision. Always follow the restraint● Position the lap belt as low and snug as Modifying or tampering with the seat manufacturer’s inspection instructions possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE belt system may result in serious per- and replacement recommendations. WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could sonal injury. The child restraints should be replaced increase the risk of internal injuries in if they are damaged. an accident.1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • PREGNANT WOMEN THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTNISSAN recommends that pregnant women use WITH RETRACTORseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possible WARNINGaround the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder ● Every person who drives or rides in thisbelt over your shoulder and across your chest. vehicle should use a seat belt at allNever run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab- times.dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations. ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can beINJURED PERSONS dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident,NISSAN recommends that injured persons use you could be thrown into it and receiveseat belts. Check with your doctor for specific neck or other serious injuries. Yourecommendations. WRS0174 could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown ● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts (Front seats the vehicle is in motion, the seat should all models and rear seats Crew cab be upright. Always sit well back in the models) seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. ᭺ 1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
    • The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode LRS0594 LRS0595 after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-᭺2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor ᭺ 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug straints” later in this section for more information. and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown. you hear and feel the latch engage. The ALR mode should be used only for ᭺ 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the child restraint installation. During normal ● The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode a sudden stop or on impact. A slow shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder should not be activated. If it is activated it pulling motion permits the seat belt to and across your chest. move, and allows you some freedom of may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten- The front passenger seat and the rear seating sion. It can also change the operation of movement in the seat. positions three-point seat belts have two modes the front passenger air bag. See “Front ● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation: passenger air bag and status light” later in its fully retracted position, firmly pull this section. ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNINGWhen fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.Fastening the seat belts (Jump seatsKing cab models) LRS0556 LRS0569 1. Open the jump seat. See “Seats” earlier in ᭺ 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor this section. and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. ● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
    • movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re- straints” later in this section for more information. The ALR mode should be used only for LRS0570 WRS0139 child restraint installation. During normal᭺3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode Unfastening the seat belts on the hips as shown. should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten- ᭺ 1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on᭺4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the sion. It can also change the operation of the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the the front passenger air bag. See “Front tracts. shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder passenger air bag and status light” later in and across your chest. Checking seat belt operation this section.The jump seat position’s three-point seat belts Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belthave two modes of operation: WARNING movement by two separate methods: ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) When fastening the seat belts, be certain ● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the that the seatbacks are completely se- retractor. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) cured in the latched position. If they are ● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode not completely secured, passengers mayallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow be injured in an accident or sudden stop.the driver and passengers some freedom of1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • To increase your confidence in the seat belts, WARNINGcheck the operation as follows: ● After adjustment, release the adjust- ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward ment button and try to move the shoul- quickly. The retractor should lock and re- der belt anchor up and down to make strict further belt movement. sure it is securely fixed in position.If the retractor does not lock during this check or ● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldif you have any questions about seat belt opera- be adjusted to the position best for you.tion, see a NISSAN dealer. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS LRS0242 If, because of body size or driving position, it is Shoulder belt height adjustment (front not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt seats) and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- length and may be used for either the driver or tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN To adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺ and 1 dealer for assistance if an extender is required. move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position ᭺, so the belt passes over the center of 2 the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
    • CHILD SAFETY ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt Children need adults to help protect them. WARNING guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat They need to be properly restrained.● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder by the same company which made the belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. In addition to the general information in this original equipment seat belts, should manual, child safety information is available from be used with NISSAN seat belts. ● Periodically check to see that the seat many other sources, including doctors, teachers, belt and the metal components, such as government traffic safety offices, and community● Adults and children who can use the buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires organizations. Every child is different, so be sure standard seat belt should not use an and anchors work properly. If loose parts, to learn the best way to transport your child. extender. Such unnecessary use could deterioration, cuts or other damage on the result in serious personal injury in the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- There are three basic types of child restraint event of an accident. sembly should be replaced. systems:● Never use seat belt extenders to install ● Rear-facing child restraint child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be ● Forward-facing child restraint seriously injured in a collision or a sud- ● Booster seat den stop. The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing mild soap solution or any solution recom- child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. are available for children who outgrow rear- Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle seat belts to retract until they are completely lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer dry. use a forward-facing child restraint.1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING This is especially important because your LARGER CHILDREN vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-Infants and children need special protec- tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- Children who are too large for child restraintstion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” should be seated and restrained by the seat beltsthem properly. The shoulder belt may later in this section. which are provided. The seat belt may not fitcome too close to the face or neck. The properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5lap belt may not fit over their small hip INFANTS cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) andbones. In an accident, an improperly fit- Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toting seat belt could cause serious or fatal in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- obtain proper seat belt fit.injury. Always use appropriate child mends that infants be placed in child restraintsrestraints. NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety commercially available booster seat if the shoul-All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the laptories require the use of approved child restraints Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-for infants and small children. See “Child Re- men. The booster seat should raise the child sostraints” later in this section. facturer’s instructions for installation and use. that the shoulder belt is properly positionedA child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by SMALL CHILDREN across the top, middle portion of the shoulderusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth- and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat Children that are over one year old and weigh aters for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward- can only be used in seating positions that have abelt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in- facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s three-point type seat belt. The booster seatformation. instructions for minimum and maximum weight should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and height recommendations. NISSAN recom- fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicleand children be restrained in the rear seat if mends that small children be placed in child Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicleavailable (Crew Cab models). Studies show restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown sothat children are safer when properly re- Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the facestrained in the rear seat than in the front Safety Standards. You should choose a child and neck, use the shoulder belt without theseat. restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow booster seat. the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
    • CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNINGNever let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision. ARS1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD WARNING RESTRAINTS ● Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use and installa- tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • – Infants and children should never be – Child restraint anchor points are de- This vehicle (Crew cab model only) is equipped held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron- signed to withstand loads from child with a universal child restraint anchor system, gest adult cannot resist the forces of restraints that are properly fitted. referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and a collision. Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re- – Never use the anchor points for adult straints include rigid or webbing-mounted at-– Do not put a seat belt around both a seat belts or harnesses. tachments that can be connected to these an- child and another passenger. – A child restraint with a top tether chors. For details, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors– NISSAN recommends that all child strap should not be used in the front and Tethers for CHildren) system” later in this restraints be installed in the rear passenger seat. section. seat. Studies show that children are – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- If you do not have a LATCH compatible child safer when properly restrained in the sible after fitting the child restraint. restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child – Infants and children should always Several manufacturers offer child restraints for restraint in the front seat, see be placed in an appropriate child re- infants and children of various sizes. When se- “Forward-facing child restraint in- straint while in the vehicle. lecting any child restraint, keep the following stallation using the seat belts” later ● When the child restraint is not in use, points in mind: in this section. keep it secured with the LATCH system– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli- ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying Bag System, never install a rear- sion, loose objects can injure occu- that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle facing child restraint in the front pants or damage the vehicle. Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor seat. An inflating air bag could seri- Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ously injure or kill a child. A rear- CAUTION ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be facing child restraint must only be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat used in the rear seat. A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating sur- and seat belt system.– Be sure to purchase a child restraint face and buckles before placing a child in that will fit the child and vehicle. the child restraint. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
    • ● If the child restraint is compatible with your The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to vehicle, place your child in the child restraint install child restraints in the rear outboard seating and check the various adjustments to be positions only (Crew cab models only). Do not sure the child restraint is compatible with attempt to install a child restraint in the center your child. Choose a child restraint that is position using the LATCH lower anchors. designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. LATCH lower anchorAll U.S. states and Canadian provinces or WARNINGterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved child Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-restraint at all times while the vehicle is tions for proper use and installation ofbeing operated. Canadian law requires the child restraints could result in serious in-top tether strap on forward-facing child jury or death of a child or other passen-restraints be secured to the designated an- gers in a sudden stop or collision: LRS0429chor point on the vehicle. – Attach LATCH system compatible LATCH system lower anchor locations child restraints only at the locations (Crew cab models only) shown in the illustration. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers – Do not secure a child restraint in the for CHildren) SYSTEM center rear seating position using Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor the LATCH lower anchors. The child points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors restraint will not be secured properly. and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible – Inspect the lower anchors by insert- child restraints. This system may also be referred ing your fingers into the lower anchor to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. area. Feel to make sure there are no With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle obstructions over the anchors such seat belt to secure the child restraint. as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an- chors are obstructed.1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0748 LRS0571 LRS0661 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH label locations (Crew cab models LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLATCH lower anchor location only) Installing child restraint LATCH lowerThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear anchor attachmentsof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is LATCH compatible child restraints include twoattached to the seatback to help you locate the rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canLATCH lower anchors. be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child re- straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the in- structions provided by the child restraint manu- facturer. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
    • Top tether anchor WARNING Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. LRS0662 LRS0572 LATCH rigid-mounted attachment Front passenger seat (King cab modelsThe child restraint top tether strap must be used only)when installing the child restraint with the LATCH Top tether anchor point locationslower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Toptether anchor” for installation instructions. Anchor points are located in the following loca- tions:When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual and ● On the back of the front passenger seatthose supplied with the child restraint. (King cab only) as shown.1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew cab models only) Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- stalling a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- er’s instructions. LRS0393 LRS0551Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) Passenger’s side jump seat● Under the rear window behind the rear (King cab models) bench seat (Crew cab only) as shown. ● On the floor between the jump seat belt buckles in the center of the vehicle (King cab only) as shown. The anchor point ᭺ is located on the floor be- 3 tween the jump seat belt buckles in the center of the vehicle. The routing bracket ᭺ is located 2 behind the cover plate ᭺ under the rear window 1 above the right passenger’s side jump seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
    • WRS0801 WRS0802 LRS0673 Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 3. For child restraints that are equipped with ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check webbing-mounted attachments, remove any to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- additional slack from the anchor attach- erly attached to the lower anchors. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4. LRS0674 WRS0256 Rear-facing – step 4 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT to side while holding the child restraint near BELTS — (Crew cab models only) the LATCH attachment path. The child re- straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve- hicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
    • WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section. WRS0256 WRS0761 Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- restraint and insert it into the buckle until you stalling a child restraint. hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child structions for belt routing. restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0669 LRS0670 WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 53. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the center of the child restraint to compress mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode pulling up on the seat belt. when the seat belt is fully retracted. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
    • 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0763 LRS0597 Rear-facing – step 6 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT to side while holding the child restraint near BELTS — PASSENGER’S SIDE the seat belt path. The child restraint should JUMP SEAT (King cab models only) not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING – The front seat cannot be used when a rear-facing child restraint is installed● The three-point seat belt with Auto- on the jump seat. Attempting to do so matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be could cause serious injury in a sud- used when installing a child restraint. den stop or collision. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.● Do not install a child restraint system LRS0549 on the passenger’s side jump seat with- out unfolding the seat extender. WARNING ● To install a rear-facing child restraint on● A child restraint system will not be in- the passenger’s side jump seat, it will stalled properly and the child could be be necessary to move the front passen- seriously injured or killed in a sudden ger’s seat fully forward and place the stop or collision. front seatback upright or tilt it forward. – Never install a child restraint system Failure to do so may cause the child on the driver’s side jump seat. restraint to not be installed properly – Do not install a child restraint system and cause serious injury or death in a on the passenger’s side jump seat sudden stop or collision. without unfolding the seat extender. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
    • LRS0559 LRS0537 LRS0544Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Rear-facing (passenger’s side jump seatSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- only) — step 2stalling a child restraint. ᭺ Move the front passenger’s seat into the 2 FULL FORWARD position. Then move theFollow these steps to install a child restraint on front seatback to the upright or tilted forwardthe passenger’s side jump seat. position. Position the child restraint on the 1. To access the jump seat extension ᭺ on the 1 jump seat. The direction of the child restraint passenger’s side jump seat only, pull up ᭺ 2 depends on the type of the child restraint on the extension to unfold it to the open and the size of the child. Always follow the position. Then unfold the two support legs restraint manufacturer’s instructions. ᭺ and lower the jump seat to the full open 3 ᭺ seating position. 41-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0545 LRS0546 LRS0547 Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5᭺3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child ᭺ 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully ᭺ 5 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. hear and feel the latch engage. is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode facturer’s instructions for belt routing. when the seat belt is fully retracted. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
    • 8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew cab model only) Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- WRS0762 WRS0918 stalling a child restraint. Rear-facing – step 6 Rear-facing — step 7 Follow these steps to install a forward-facing 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side LATCH system: the center of the child restraint to compress to side while holding the seat near the seat the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while belt path. The child restraint should not 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- pulling up on the seat belt. move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to ways follow the child restraint manufactur- side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if er’s instructions. the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WRS0799 WRS0800 LRS0671 Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing – step 42. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 3. The back of the child restraint should be 4. For child restraints that are equipped with ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check secured against the vehicle seatback. webbing-mounted attachments, remove any to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- additional slack from the anchor attach- If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest erly attached to the lower anchors. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the in the center of the child restraint with your If the child restraint is equipped with a top headrest is removed, store it in a secure knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion tether strap, route the top tether strap and place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest and seatback while tightening the webbing secure the tether strap to the tether anchor when the child restraint is removed. of the anchor attachments. point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for headrest adjustment information. section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat- If the seating position does not have an ing positions that do not have a top tether adjustable headrest and it is interfering with anchor. the proper child restraint fit, try another seat- ing position or a different child restraint. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
    • 6. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH SEAT (Crew cab models only) WRS0697 WRS0699 Forward-facing – step 5 WARNING Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – 5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- The three-point seat belt with Automatic step 1 fore you place the child in it. Push it from side Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child to side while holding the child restraint near when installing a child restraint. Failure to Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- the LATCH attachment path. The child re- use the ALR mode will result in the child stalling a child restraint. straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 restraint not being properly secured. The Follow these steps to install a forward-facing mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward restraint could tip over or be loose and child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the and check to see if the LATCH attachment cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or rear seats (Crew cab models only) or in the front collision. Also, it can change the opera- passenger seat: holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment tion of the front passenger air bag. See 1. If you must install a child restraint in as necessary, or put the restraint in another “Front passenger air bag and status light” the front seat, it should be placed in a later in this section. forward-facing direction only. Move seat and test it again. You may need to try a the seat to the rearmost position. Child different child restraint. Not all child re- restraints for infants must be used in straints fit in all types of vehicles. the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- er’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust- able headrest” in this section for head re- straint or headrest adjustment, removal and WRS0680 LRS0667 installation information. Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4 If the seating position does not have an 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully adjustable head restraint or headrest and it restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is interfering with the proper child restraint hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fit, try another seating position or a different follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to child restraint. structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “In- stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
    • LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 7 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the child restraint near knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt path. The child restraint should and seatback while pulling up on the seat not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from belt. side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • 8. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. WRS0475 LRS0598 Forward-facing – step 11 FOWARD-FACING CHILD 10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING the ON position. The front passenger air bag THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT status light should illuminate. If this PASSENGER AND PASSENGER’S light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger SIDE JUMP SEAT (King cab models air bag and status lightЉ in this section. only) Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- straint mode) is canceled. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
    • WARNING ● To install a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat, it will● The three-point seat belt with Auto- be necessary to move the front passen- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be ger’s seat fully forward and place the used when installing a child restraint. front seatback upright or tilt it forward. Failure to use the ALR mode will result Failure to do so may cause the child in the child restraint not being properly restraint to not be installed properly secured. The restraint could tip over or and cause serious injury or death in a be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- – The front seat cannot be used when a senger air bag. See “Front passenger rear-facing child restraint is installed air bag and status light” later in this on the jump seat. Attempting to do so section. could cause serious injury in a sud- den stop or collision. WRS0699● Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat with- Foward-facing (front passenger seat) — out unfolding the seat extender. step 1● A child restraint system will not be in- Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in- stalled properly and the child could be stalling a child restraint. seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the – Never install a child restraint system passenger’s side jump seat (King cab models on the driver’s side jump seat. only) or in the front passenger seat: – Do not install a child restraint system 1. If you must install a child restraint in on the passenger’s side jump seat the front seat, it should be placed in a without unfolding the seat extender. forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0559 LRS0537 WRS09192. To access the jump seat extension ᭺ on the 1 Forward-facing (passenger’s side seating passenger’s side jump seat pull up ᭺ on2 position only) — step 3 the extension to unfold it to the open posi- 3. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- tion. Then unfold the two support legs ᭺ 3 ways follow the child restraint manufactur- and lower the jump seat to the full open ᭺ 4 er’s instructions. seating position. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
    • able headrest” in this section for head re- straint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. WRS0680 LRS0667 Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5 4. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seat- ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor.1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing – step 7 Forward-facing — step 86. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 7. Remove any additional slack from the seat 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the seat near the seat knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion belt path. The child restraint should not and seatback while pulling up on the seat move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to belt. side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child re- straints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
    • 9. Tighten the tether strap according to the 2. Route the top tether strap ᭺ between the 1 manufacturer’s instructions to remove any head restraint and the top of the seatback. slack. 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor10. Check to make sure that the child restraint is point ᭺ on the seatback. 2 properly secured prior to each use. If the 4. Refer back to child restraint installation seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 steps before tightening the tether strap. through 8. If you have any questions when installing aAfter the child restraint is removed and the seat top tether strap, consult your NISSANbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- dealer for details.straint mode) is canceled. LRS0572 Front passenger seat (King cab models only) INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (Front passenger seat – King cab models only) Before securing the child restraint with the seat belt, 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re- straint to position the top tether strap ᭺ 1 over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraint adjustment” in this section for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • 1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top tether strap routing bracket for the passen- ger’s side jump seat. 2. Route the top tether strap through the rout- ing bracket. 3. Secure the top tether strap to the tether anchor point (3) located between the seat belt buckles in the center of the vehicle. 4. Refer back to child restraint installation steps before tightening the tether strap. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN LRS0561 dealer for details. LRS0392Passenger’s side jump seat (King cab mod- Anchor point access els only)INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP(Passenger’s side jump seat – Kingcab models only) WARNINGDo not secure the top tether strap to therouting bracket. If the child restraint is notanchored properly, the risk of a child be-ing injured or killed in a collision or asudden stop greatly increases.First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
    • 1. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to BOOSTER SEATS position the top tether strap ᭺ over the top 1 Precautions on booster seats of the seatback. If the headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall WARNING the headrest when the child restraint is re- moved. See “Adjustable headrest” in If a booster seat and seat belt are not used this section for headrest adjustment, properly, the risk of a child being injured removal and installation information. in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: 2. Position the top tether strap over the top of – Make sure the shoulder portion of the seatback and under the head restraint. the belt is away from the child’s face 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor and neck and the lap portion of the point on the seat directly behind the child belt does not cross the stomach. LRS0576 restraint. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) 4. Return the seatback to the locked position. behind the child or under the child’s arm.INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 5. Refer back to child restraint installation – A booster seat must only be installed(Rear bench seat – Crew cab models steps before tightening the tether strap. in a seating position that has aonly) If you have any questions when installing a lap/shoulder belt.To access the anchor points ᭺ behind the rear 2 top tether strap, consult your NISSANbench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward by dealer for details.lifting up on the pull strap ᭺ behind the seat- 1back.Before securing the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating po-sitions only [crew cab models only]) or the seatbelt, as applicable, follow these steps.1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464Booster seats of various sizes are offered by ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orseveral manufacturers. When selecting any supported by the booster seat or vehicle territories require that infants and smallbooster seat, keep the following points in mind: seat. The seatback must be at or above the children be restrained in an approved child center of the child’s ears. For example, if a restraint at all times while the vehicle is ● Choose only a booster seat with a label low back booster seat ᭺ is chosen, the 1 being operated. certifying that it complies with Federal Motor vehicle seatback must be at or above the The instructions in this section apply to booster Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is seat installation in the rear seats or the front Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. lower than the center of the child’s ears, a passenger seat. ● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be high back booster seat ᭺ should be used. 2 sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat ● If the booster seat is compatible with your and seat belt system. vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended pro- cedures. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
    • Booster seat installation on frontpassenger seat and rear seat (Crewcab models only) CAUTIONDo not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat: WRS0699 LRS0454 1. If you must install a booster seat in the Front passenger position front seat, move the seat to the rear- 3. The booster seat should be positioned on most position. the vehicle seat so that it is stable. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- place it in a front-facing direction. Always straint or headrest to obtain the correct follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- booster seat fit. If the head restraint or head- structions. rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is re- moved. See “Head restraint adjustment” or “Adjustable headrest” in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment, re- moval and installation information.1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • If the seating position does not have an Booster seat installation on adjustable head restraint or headrest and it passenger’s side jump seat only (King is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different cab models only) booster seat. WARNING4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to ● Do not install a child restraint system follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- on the passenger’s side jump seat with- structions for adjusting the seat belt routing. out unfolding the seat extender.5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt ● A child restraint system will not be in- toward the retractor to take up extra slack. stalled properly and the child could be Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned seriously injured or killed in a sudden across the top, middle portion of the child’s stop or collision. shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat WRS0475 – Never install a child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the on the driver’s side jump seat. 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front seat belt routing. passenger seat, place the ignition switch in – Do not install a child restraint system6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- the ON position. The front passenger air bag on the passenger’s side jump seat tions for properly fastening a seat belt status light may or may not illuminate, without unfolding the seat extender. shown in “Three-point type seat belt with depending on the size of the child and the retractor” earlier in this section. ● To install a rear-facing child restraint on type of booster seat being used. See “Front the passenger’s side jump seat, it will passenger air bag and status light” later in be necessary to move the front passen- this section. ger’s seat fully forward and place the front seatback upright or tilt it forward. Failure to do so may cause the child restraint to not be installed properly and cause serious injury or death in a sudden stop or collision. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
    • – The front seat cannot be used when a rear-facing child restraint is installed on the jump seat. Attempting to do so could cause serious injury in a sud- den stop or collision. CAUTIONDo not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint. LRS0559 LRS0537Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the 1. To access the jump seat extension ᭺ on the 1passenger’s side jump seat only: passenger’s side jump seat only pull up ᭺ 2 on the extension to unfold it to the open position. Then unfold the two support legs ᭺ and lower the jump seat to the full open 3 ᭺ seating position. 41-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM If the seating position does not have an PRECAUTIONS ON adjustable headrest and it is interfering with SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT the proper booster seat fit, try another seat- ing position or a different booster seat. SYSTEM 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to tion contains important information concerning follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- the following systems: structions for adjusting the seat belt routing. ● Driver and passenger supplemental front- 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag toward the retractor to take up extra slack. System) Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s ● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat mental air bag LRS0539 manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- seat belt routing. over supplemental air bag2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- ● Seat belt with pretensioner follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- tions for properly fastening a seat belt structions. shown in “Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental front-impact air bag system: retractor” earlier in this section. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help3. The booster seat should be positioned on cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the vehicle seat so that it is stable. the driver and front passenger in certain frontal If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest collisions. to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- headrest is removed, store it in a secure mental air bag system: This system can help place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest cushion the impact force to the chest area of the when the booster seat is removed. See driver and front passenger in certain side impact “Adjustable headrest” in this section for collisions. The side air bags are designed to headrest adjustment, removal and installa- inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. tion information. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
    • Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-over air bags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, bothcurtain and rollover air bags are designed toinflate and remain inflated for a short time.These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis- WRS0031tance away from the steering wheel, instrument WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags arepanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier most effective when you are sitting wellin this section for instructions and precautions on ● The front air bags ordinarily will not back and upright in the seat. The frontseat belt usage. inflate in the event of a side impact, rear air bags inflate with great force. Even impact, rollover, or lower severity fron- with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-The supplemental air bags operate only tal collision. Always wear your seatwhen the ignition switch is in the ON or tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning belts to help reduce the risk or severity forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-START position. of injury in various kinds of accidents. tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofAfter placing the ignition switch in the ON ● The front passenger air bag will not injury or death in a crash. You may alsoposition, the supplemental air bag warning inflate if the passenger air bag status receive serious or fatal injuries from thelight illuminates. The supplemental air bag light is lit or if the front passenger seat front air bag if you are up against itwarning light will turn off after about 7 is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air when it inflates. Always sit back againstseconds if the system is operational. bag and status light” later in this the seatback and as far away as practi- section. cal from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts.1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • ● The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us- age then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.● The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in ARS1133 this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.● Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
    • ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043 WARNING WARNING● Never let children ride unrestrained or ● Children may be severely injured or extend their hands or face out of the killed when the front air bags, side air window. Do not attempt to hold them in bags or curtain and rollover air bags your lap or arms. Some examples of inflate if they are not properly re- dangerous riding positions are shown strained. Pre-teens and children should in the illustrations. be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256 WARNING ● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating front air bag could seriously in- jure or kill your child. See “Child re- straints” earlier in this section for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
    • WRS0431 LRS0396 SSS0162 Do not lean against the door. Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. WARNINGFront seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:● The side air bags and curtain and roll- over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear im- pact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING● The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples LRS0421 SSS0159 of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING ● When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ● Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
    • 1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod- ules 5. Crash zone sensor 6. Occupant classification system control unit 7. Occupant classification sensor (pres- sure sensor) 8. Satellite sensors 9. Seat belt buckle switches 10. Seat belt with pretensioner 11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules LRS05651-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it cause irritation and choking. Those with a history(front seats) additionally monitors the weight of an occupant of a breathing condition should get fresh air or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based promptly.This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- on information from the sensors, only one front air Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the help to cushion the impact force on the face andpassenger seats. This system is designed to crash severity and whether the front occupants chest of the front occupants. They can help savemeet certification requirements under U.S. regu- are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front lives and reduce serious injuries. However, anlations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, passenger air bag may be automatically turned inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsall of the information, cautions and warn- OFF under some conditions, depending on the or other injuries. Front air bags do not provideings in this manual still apply and must be weight detected on the passenger seat and how restraint to the lower body.followed. the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsThe driver supplemental front-impact air bag is is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-located in the center of the steering wheel. The illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will senger seated upright as far as practical awaypassenger supplemental front-impact air bag is not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Themounted in the dashboard above the glove box. “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in front air bags inflate quickly in order to helpThe front air bags are designed to inflate in higher this section for further details. One front air bag protect the front occupants. Because of this, theseverity frontal collisions, although they may in- inflating does not indicate improper performance force of the front air bag inflating can increase theflate if the forces in another type of collision are of the system. risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or issimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. against, the front air bag module during inflation.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. If you have any questions about your air bagVehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.indication of proper front air bag system opera- dealer. If you are considering modification of your The front air bags operate only when thetion. vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact ignition switch is in the ON or START posi- NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the tion.The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual front of this Owner’s Manual.stage inflators. It also monitors information from After placing the ignition switch in the ONthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise position, the supplemental air bag warning(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. light illuminates. The supplemental air bagsification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a warning light will turn off after about 7ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may seconds if the system is operational.based on the severity of a collision and seat belt Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
    • Status light as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used The front passenger air bag status light is to meet the requirements. located near the climate controls. The light oper- ates as follows: One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the ● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is front passenger seat cushion and is designed to OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF detect an occupant and objects on the seat by and will not inflate in a crash. weight. It works together with seat belt sensors ● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, described later. For example, if a child is in the child or child restraint as outlined in this front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys- section: The illuminates to indicate tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag that the front passenger air bag is OFF and OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a will not inflate in a crash. child restraint of the type specified in the regula- WRS0475 tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s ● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-Front passenger air bag and status light ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec- weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera- tion: The light is OFF to indicate that WARNING tion can vary depending on the front passenger the front passenger air bag is operational. seat belt sensors.The front passenger air bag is designed to Front passenger air bagautomatically turn OFF under some con- The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-ditions. Read this section carefully to The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and thelearn how it operates. Proper use of the matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated amount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- under some conditions as described below in it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)essary for most effective protection. Fail- accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front mode (child restraint mode). Based on theure to follow all instructions in this passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a weight on the seat detected by the occupantmanual concerning the use of seats, seat crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your classification sensor and the belt tension de-belts and child restraints can increase the vehicle are not part of this system. tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bagrisk or severity of injury in an accident. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce System determines whether the front passenger the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag air bag should be automatically turned OFF as to certain front passenger seat occupants, such required by the regulations.1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • Front passenger seat adult occupants who are If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the installed properly, the seat belt is used properlyproperly seated and using the seat belt as out- passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a and the occupant is positioned properly. If the airlined in this manual should not cause the passen- crash. However, heavy objects placed on the bag status light is not illuminated, reposition theger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For seat could result in air bag inflation, because of occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the the object’s weight detected by the occupant If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- classification sensor. Other conditions could also minate even though you believe that the childion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is restraint, the seat belts and the occupant areon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out standing on the seat, or if two children are on the properly positioned, the system may be sensingof position), this could cause the sensor to turn seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that theimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode, are seated and restrained properly. system is OFF by using a special tool. However,this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. until you have confirmed with your dealer that Using the passenger air bag status light, you can your air bag is working properly, reposition theAlways be sure to be seated and wearing the seat monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.belt properly for the most effective protection by tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.the seat belt and supplemental air bag. The air bag system and passenger air bag status The light will not illuminate when the front pas-NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children senger seat is unoccupied. light will take a few seconds to register a changebe properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also in the passenger seat status. For example, if a If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- large adult who is sitting in the front passengerrecommends that appropriate child restraints and ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagbooster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the status light will go from OFF to ON for a fewthis is not possible, the occupant classification person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat seconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemsensor and seat belt sensors are designed to op- properly or not using the seat belt properly. operation and does not indicate a malfunction.erate as described above to turn the front passen-ger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airrequired by the regulations. Failing to properly se- the passenger air bag status light may or may not bag system, the supplemental air bag warningcure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may be illuminated, depending on the size of the child light , located in the meter and gauges areaallow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or and the type of child restraint being used. If the air of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could beSee “Child restraints” earlier in this section for that the child restraint or seat belt is not beingproper use and installation. used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
    • Other supplemental front-impact air bag ● Tampering with the front air bag system ● Work on and around the front air bagprecautions may result in serious personal injury. system should be done by a NISSAN Tampering includes changes to the dealer. Installation of electrical equip- WARNING steering wheel and the instrument ment should also be done by a NISSAN● Do not place any objects on the steer- panel assembly by placing material dealer. The Supplemental Restraint ing wheel pad or on the instrument over the steering wheel pad and above System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should panel. Also, do not place any objects the instrument panel or by installing not be modified or disconnected. Unau- between any occupant and the steering additional trim material around the air thorized electrical test equipment and wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- bag system. probing devices should not be used on jects may become dangerous projec- the air bag system. ● Modifying or tampering with the front tiles and cause injury if the front air passenger seat may result in serious ● A cracked windshield should be re- bags inflate. personal injury. For example, do not placed immediately by a qualified re-● Immediately after inflation, several change the front seats by placing mate- pair facility. A cracked windshield could front air bag system components will be rial on the seat cushion or by installing affect the function of the supplemental hot. Do not touch them; you may se- additional trim material, such as seat air bag system. verely burn yourself. covers, on the seat that are not specifi- cally designed to assure proper air bag *The SRS wiring harness connectors are● No unauthorized changes should be operation. Additionally, do not stow any yellow and orange for easy identification. made to any components or wiring of objects under the front passenger seat When selling your vehicle, we request that you the supplemental air bag system. This is or the seat cushion and seatback. Such inform the buyer about the front air bag system to prevent accidental inflation of the objects may interfere with the proper and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections supplemental air bag or damage to the operation of the occupant classifica- in this Owner’s Manual. supplemental air bag system. tion sensor (pressure sensor).● Do not make unauthorized changes to ● No unauthorized changes should be your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- made to any components or wiring of pension system or front end structure. the seat belt system. This may affect the This could affect proper operation of front air bag system. Tampering with the front air bag system. the seat belt system may result in seri- ous personal injury.1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • collisions, although they may inflate if the forces sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain in another type of collision are similar to those of and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to a higher severity side impact. They are designed the lower body. to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- The seat belts should be correctly worn and the pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli- driver and passenger seated upright as far as sions. practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to passengers should be seated as far away as inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near practical from the door finishers and side roof rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air (for example, during severe off roading) may bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate. occupants. Because of this, the force of the side Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating indication of proper side air bag and curtain and can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is WRS0422 rollover air bag operation. too close to, or is against, these air bag modulesFront seat-mounted side-impact during inflation. The side air bag will deflate When the side air bags and curtain and rollover quickly after the collision is over.supplemental air bag and roof- air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,mounted curtain side-impact and followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in- harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should flated for a short time.rollover supplemental air bag systems be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing The side air bags and curtain and rolloverThe side air bags are located in the outside of the condition should get fresh air promptly. air bags operate only when the ignitionseatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll- switch is in the ON or START position.over air bags are located in the side roof rails. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,These systems are designed to meet voluntary help to cushion the impact force on the chest of After placing the ignition switch in the ONguidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags position, the supplemental air bag warningout-of-position occupants. However, all of the help to cushion the impact force to the head of light illuminates. The supplemental air baginformation, cautions and warnings in this occupants in the front and rear outboard seating warning light will turn off after about 7manual still apply and must be followed. positions. They can help save lives and reduce seconds if the system is operational.The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bagare designed to inflate in higher severity side or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
    • WARNING ● Tampering with the side air bag system Seat belts with pretensioners (Front● Do not place any objects near the seat- may result in serious personal injury. seats) For example, do not change the front back of the front seats. Also, do not seats by placing material near the seat- place any objects (an umbrella, bag, WARNING backs or by installing additional trim etc.) between the front door finisher material, such as seat covers, around ● The pretensioners cannot be reused af- and the front seat. Such objects may the side air bag. ter activation. They must be replaced become dangerous projectiles and together with the retractor and buckle cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● Work around and on the side air bag as a unit. and curtain and rollover air bag systems● Right after inflation, several side air bag should be done by a NISSAN dealer. ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a and curtain and rollover air bag system Installation of electrical equipment frontal collision but a pretensioner is components will be hot. Do not touch should also be done by a NISSAN not activated, be sure to have the pre- them; you may severely burn yourself. dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* tensioner system checked and, if nec-● No unauthorized changes should be should not be modified or discon- essary, replaced by your NISSAN made to any components or wiring of nected. Unauthorized electrical test dealer. the side air bag and curtain and rollover equipment and probing devices should ● No unauthorized changes should be air bag systems. This is to prevent dam- not be used on the side air bag or cur- made to any components or wiring of age to or accidental inflation of the side tain and rollover air bag systems. the pretensioner system. This is to pre- air bag and curtain and rollover air bag vent damage to or accidental activation systems. * The SRS wiring harness or connectors are of the pretensioners. Tampering with yellow or orange for easy identification. the pretensioner system may result in● Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- When selling your vehicle, we request that you serious personal injury. pension system or side panel. This inform the buyer about the side air bag and ● Work around and on the pretensioner could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the system should be done by a NISSAN curtain and rollover air bag systems. buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s dealer. Installation of electrical equip- Manual. ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • ● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys- or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN tem, the supplemental air bag warning dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures light will not come on, will flash intermit- could cause personal injury. tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in theThe pretensioner system activates in conjunction ON or START position. In this case, the preten-with the front air bag system. The pretensioner sioner system may not function properly. Theysystem also activates with the curtain and rollover must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicleair bags in certain types of rollover collisions or to the nearest NISSAN dealer.near rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle When selling your vehicle, we request that youbecomes involved in certain types of collisions, inform the buyer about the pretensioner systemhelping to restrain front seat occupants. and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same way WRS0885as conventional seat belts. 1. SRS Air Bag Warning LabelsWhen a pretensioner activates, smoke is re- The warning labels are located on the sur-leased and a loud noise may be heard. This face of the sun visor.smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGcause irritation and choking. Those with a history WARNING LABELSof a breathing condition should get fresh air Warning labels about the supplemental front-promptly. impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asAfter pretensioner activation, load limiters allow shown in the illustration.the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71
    • When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or WARNING START position, the supplemental air bag warn- ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then If the supplemental air bag warning light turns off. This means the system is operational. is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag If any of the following conditions occur, the front and/or pretensioner systems will not op- air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag erate in an accident. To help avoid injury and pretensioner systems need servicing: to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as ● The supplemental air bag warning light re- possible. mains on after approximately 7 seconds. ● The supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement procedure flashes intermittently. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and ● The supplemental air bag warning light does rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed LRS0100 not come on at all. to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air warning light remains illuminated after inflationWARNING LIGHT bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner has occurred. Repair and replacement of theseThe supplemental air bag warning light, systems may not operate properly. They must be supplemental air bag systems should be donedisplaying in the instrument panel, moni- checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the only by a NISSAN dealer.tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact nearest NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the ve-air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple- hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain andmental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact rollover air bags, pretensioners and related partsand rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt should be pointed out to the person performingpretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in- the maintenance. The ignition switch should al-clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone ways be in the LOCK position when workingsensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, occu- under the hood or inside the vehicle.pant classification sensor, front air bag modules,side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bagmodules, pretensioners and all related wiring.1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
    • WARNING● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Addition- ally, if any of the front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired.● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in- spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.● If you need to dispose of a supplemen- tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor- rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73
    • 2 Instruments and controlsInstrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-29 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-8 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Compass and outside temperature display(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switchWarning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switchSecurity systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Under-seat storage bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
    • Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Seat pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Operating the HomeLinkா universalWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-54Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
    • INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Vents (P. 4-2) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-26) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands- Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-35, P. 4-37) 4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-57, P. 2-31) 5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights (P. 2-3, 2-13) 6. Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-20) 7. Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-25) 8. Storage (P. 2-36) 9. Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-17) 10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40) 12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-66) 13. Auxiliary audio input jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-34) 14. Power outlet (P. 2-35) LIC14222-2 Instruments and controls
    • METERS AND GAUGES15. Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32) Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-33) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)16. Shift selector (P. 5-13,5-17 )17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-22)18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P.4-10)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)21. Tilt steering wheel control (if so equipped) (P. 3-12)22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-31)23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)24. Outside mirror controls (if so equipped) WIC1040 (P. 3-15) 1. Warning/indicator lights 6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip 2. Tachometer computer (if so equipped) 3. Speedometer 7. Engine oil pressure gauge 4. Fuel gauge (if so equipped) 5. Voltmeter (if so equipped) 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls 2-3
    • SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the ve- hicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of WIC0912 individual trips. LIC07801. Speedometer With twin trip odometer2. Odometer/Twin trip odometer Changing the display:3. Change button For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer, pushing the change button changes the display as follows: Trip → Trip → Trip2-4 Instruments and controls
    • TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to (----). The display of the trip computer is situated in the speedometer display. When the ignition switch is NOTE: placed in the ON position, the display scrolls all ● If the amount of fuel added while the the modes of the trip computer and then shows ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- the mode chosen before the ignition switch was play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. turned OFF may continue to be dis- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON played. position, modes of the trip computer can be ● When driving uphill or rounding curves, selected by pushing the trip computer change the fuel in the tank shifts, which may button. The following modes can be selected: momentarily change the display. LIC0781 Distance to empty (dte—mile or km) Average speed (MPH or km/h) With trip computer The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you The average speed mode shows the averageFor vehicles equipped with trip computer, push- with an estimation of the distance that can be vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneing the change button changes the display as driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- by pressing the change button for more thanfollows: ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the approximately 1 second. The display is updated fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after aTrip → Trip → Distance to Empty → reset, the display shows (----). The display is updated every 30 seconds.Average speed → Average fuel consumption →Journey time → Trip The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode isFor additional information, refer to “Trip com- automatically selected and the digits blink in or-puter” later in this section. der to draw the driver’s attention. Press theResetting the trip odometer: change button if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred.Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until theond resets the currently displayed trip odometer vehicle is refueled.to zero. Instruments and controls 2-5
    • Average fuel consumption (Mpg orl/100km)The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the change buttonfor more than approximately 1 second. The dis-play is updated every 30 seconds. At about thefirst 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the change button for more than ap- LIC0738 LIC0739proximately 1 second. TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURETrip computer reset The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGEPushing the change button for more than 3 sec- lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis- into the red zone ᭺. 1 ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thetance to empty (dte). normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points 1 CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration. When engine speed approaches the red The engine coolant temperature varies with the zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en- gine speed. Operating the engine in the outside air temperature and driving conditions. red zone may cause serious engine damage.2-6 Instruments and controls
    • CAUTION The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normal CAUTIONrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor- ● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as the Malfunction Indicator Lightsafely possible. If the engine is over- (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon asheated, continued operation of the ve- possible. After a few driving trips,hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In the light should turn off. If thecase of emergency” section for immediate light remains on after a few drivingaction required. trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. LIC0740 ● For additional information, see “Mal- FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section. The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty). Instruments and controls 2-7
    • CAUTION ● This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) ● If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine. LIC0741 WIC0913ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if VOLTMETER (if so equipped)so equipped) When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys- tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-needle should be in the middle of the gauge when erator voltage.the engine is running. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (11 - 15 volts) ᭺ while the engine is 1 running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.2-8 Instruments and controls
    • COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if soequipped)This unit has the following functions: ● When the outside temperature is between 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the display ● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi- will read 140°F (60°C). When the tempera- cates heading direction of vehicle ture is above 194°F (90°C), the display will ● Indicates outside air temperature read “SC”.With the ignition switch in the ON position, press ● When the outside temperature is betweenthe button as described in the chart below -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), the dis-to activate various features of the automatic anti- play will read -40°F (-40°C). When the tem-glare review mirror. perature is below -60°F (-51°C), the display will read “OC”. Push and hold Feature: the (Push button again for about 1 sec- ● The outside temperature sensor is located in button for about: ond to change settings) front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direc- Compass/outside temperature dis- tion and other driving conditions. The display 1 second LIC0583 play toggles on/off may differ from the actual outside tempera- Outside temperature display toggles OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ture or the temperature displayed on various 3 seconds between °F and °C signs or billboards. Push the button for about 1 second when Compass zone can be changed to the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the 8 seconds ● Temperature display will not update unless correct false compass readings outside temperature and compass direction dis- the vehicle is moving faster than 12 MPH 10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode play ᭺ on or off. 1 (20 km/h), or the ignition switch has been OFF for 4 hours.For information about the automatic anti-glare ● To change from °F to °C, push and holdfeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview the button for about 3 seconds untilmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust- the display begins to flash. Press the buttonments” section. again to toggle between °F and °C. Once you have selected °F or °C, the display will continue to flash for about 5 seconds, then the temperature will display. Instruments and controls 2-9
    • COMPASS DISPLAYPush the button for about 1 second whenthe ignition key is in the ON position to toggle theoutside temperature and compass direction dis-play ᭺ on or off. The display will indicate the 1direction of the vehicle’s heading.N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: WestIf the display reads “CAL”, calibrate the compassby driving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.2-10 Instruments and controls
    • Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: 1. Press and hold the button for about 8 seconds. The current zone number will ap- pear in the display. Release the button. 2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. 3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. NOTE: Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.WIC0355 Instruments and controls 2-11
    • 1. With the display turned on, press and hold CAUTION the button for about 10 seconds. The “CAL” icon in the compass display will illu- ● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., minate. which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- 2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle eration of the compass. in three complete circles at a maximum ● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h). towel or similar material dampened 3. After completing the circles, the display with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass should return to normal. cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the ● If the compass deviates from the correct mirror housing. indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. ● The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.) ● If a magnet is located in or near the overhead console in the front of the vehicle or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag- netism is disturbed, the compass display may not indicate the correct direction.2-12 Instruments and controls
    • WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control system on indicator light (if warning light so equipped) Automatic transmission oil temperature warning Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) light (if so equipped) Automatic transmission park warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light (A/T models only) ( model) or Brake warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Security indicator light (if so equipped) (if so equipped) Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so Slip indicator light for models with ABLS (if so equipped) equipped) Door open warning light Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light for models with VDC (if so equipped) Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys- Transfer 4LO position indicator light tem on indicator light (if so equipped) ( model) 4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light (if so equipped) Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) Instruments and controls 2-13
    • Automatic transmission parkCHECKING BULBS If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate warning light ( model)With all doors closed, apply the parking brake the ABS is not functioning properly. Have theand turn the ignition key to the ON position system checked by a NISSAN dealer. WARNINGwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on: If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- ● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that tion is turned off. The brake system then operates the automatic transmission P (Park) po- normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See sition will not function and the transfer , or , , , , “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- case is in neutral.The following lights come on briefly and then go tion. ● When parking, always make sure thatoff: Automatic transmission oil the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set. Failure to temperature warning light (if so engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or , , , , , , equipped) or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov- , ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious This light comes on when the automatic transmis- personal injury or property damage.If any light fails to come on, it may indicate sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comesan open circuit in the electrical system. ● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as or 4LO position again to turn off the ATPHave the system repaired promptly. soon as safely possible until the light turns off. warning light when the shift selector isWARNING LIGHTS in the P position and the ATP warning CAUTION light is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD or Anti-lock Braking Continued vehicle operation when the A/T switch into the 4LO position, move the System (ABS) oil temperature warning light is on may shift selector into the N position once, damage the automatic transmission. shift the shift selector into P again and warning light make sure the ATP warning light is OFF.)When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.2-14 Instruments and controls
    • This light indicates that the automatic transmis- WARNING CAUTIONsion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive position ● Your brake system may not be working ● Do not ground electrical accessorieswhile the shift selector is in the P (Park) position, properly if the warning light is on. Driv- directly to the battery terminal. Doingthe transmission will disengage and the drive ing could be dangerous. If you judge it so will bypass the variable control sys-wheels will not lock. to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest tem and the vehicle battery may not service station for repairs. Otherwise, charge completely. Refer to “Variable or Brake warning light have your vehicle towed because driv- voltage control system” in the “Mainte- ing it could be dangerous. nance and do-it-yourself” section laterThis light functions for both the parking brake and in this manual. ● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-the foot brake systems. gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid ● Do not continue driving if the generatorParking brake indicator level may increase your stopping dis- belt is loose, broken or missing. tance and braking will require greaterWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ON pedal effort as well as pedal travel. Door open warning lightposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied. ● If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake This light comes on when any of the doors are notLow brake fluid warning light fluid reservoir, do not drive until the closed securely while the ignition switch is brake system has been checked at a placed in the ON position.When the ignition switch is placed in the ON NISSAN dealer. Engine oil pressure warningposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is running Charge warning light lightwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following: This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the If this light comes on while the engine is running, light flickers or comes on during normal driving, 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid it may indicate the charging system is not func- pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, authorized repair shop. manual. missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the dealer immediately. warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Instruments and controls 2-15
    • The engine oil pressure warning light is not CAUTION Low fuel warning lightdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in ● If the warning light comes on or blinksthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of during operation, have your vehicle This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuelthis manual. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- possible. nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E CAUTION ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD in the tank when the fuel gauge needleRunning the engine with the engine oil reaches E (Empty).pressure warning light on could cause se- warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:rious damage to the engine almost imme- Low tire pressure warning lightdiately. Such damage is not covered by – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftwarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it switch to 2WD. Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressureis safe to do so. – in the 4LO position for automatic Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire 4WD warning light ( transmission models, stop the ve- pressure of all tires except the spare. hicle and shift the shift selector to model) the N position with the brake pedal The low tire pressure warning light warns of low depressed and shift the 4WD shift tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notThe 4WD warning light comes on when the igni- switch to 2WD. functioning properly.tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after After the ignition switch is placed in the ON – in the 4LO position for manual trans-the engine is started. position, this light illuminates for about 1 second mission models, stop the vehicle andIf the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, shift the shift selector to the N posi- and turns off.the warning light will either remain illuminated or tion with the clutch pedal depressed Low tire pressure warning:blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting and shift the 4WD shift switch toand driving” section. 2WD, If the vehicle is being driven with low tire ● If the warning light is still on after the pressure, the warning light will illuminate. above operation, have your vehicle When the low tire pressure warning light checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as illuminates, you should stop and adjust the possible. tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom- mended COLD tire pressure shown on the2-16 Instruments and controls
    • Tire and Loading Information label located ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel WARNINGin the driver’s door opening. The low tire is replaced, the TPMS will not functionpressure warning light does not automati- ● If the light does not illuminate with the and the low tire pressure warning lightcally turn off when the tire pressure is ad- ignition switch placed in the ON posi- will flash for approximately 1 minute.justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec- tion, have the vehicle checked by a The light will remain on after 1 minute.ommended pressure, the vehicle must be NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon asdriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) ● If the light illuminates while driving, possible for tire replacement and/orto activate the TPMS and turn off the low avoid sudden steering maneuvers or system resetting.tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres- abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, ● Replacing tires with those not originallysure gauge to check the tire pressure. pull off the road to a safe location and specified by NISSAN could affect the stop the vehicle as soon as possible. proper operation of the TPMS.For additional information, see “Tire Pressure Driving with under-inflated tires mayMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and permanently damage the tires and in-driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- CAUTIONsection. rious vehicle damage could occur and ● The TPMS is not a substitute for theTPMS malfunction: may lead to an accident and could re- regular tire pressure check. Be sure to sult in serious personal injury. Check check the tire pressure regularly.If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjusttire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- the tire pressure to the recommended ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), themately 1 minute when the ignition switch is and Loading Information label located TPMS may not operate correctly.placed in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a in the driver’s door opening to turn the ● Be sure to install the specified size ofNISSAN dealer. low tire pressure warning light OFF. If tires to the 4 wheels correctly. the light still comes on while drivingFor additional information, see “Tire Pressure after adjusting the tire pressure, a tireMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main- place it with a spare tire as soon astenance and do-it-yourself” section. possible. Instruments and controls 2-17
    • Low windshield washer fluid Supplemental air bag warning WARNING warning light light If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag,This light comes on when the windshield washer When the ignition switch is in the ON or START side air bag, curtain and roll-over air bagfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid position, the supplemental air bag warning light systems, and/or pretensioner systems willas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns not operate in an accident. To help avoid“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this off. This means the system is operational. injury to yourself or others, have your ve-manual. hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon If any of the following conditions occur, the front as possible. Seat belt warning light and air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-over air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and INDICATOR LIGHTS chime your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:The light and chime remind you to fasten your ● The supplemental air bag warning light re- Automatic transmissionseat belts. The light illuminates whenever the mains on after approximately 7 seconds. position indicator light (if soignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’s ● The supplemental air bag warning light equipped)seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime flashes intermittently. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting andsounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s ● The supplemental air bag warning light does driving” section of this manual.seat belt is securely fastened. not come on at all. Cruise main switch indicatorThe seat belt warning light may also illuminate if Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened light (if so equipped) restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For tensioners may not function properly. For addi- The light comes on when the cruise control main7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys- switch is pushed. The light goes out when thethe ON position, the system does not activate the tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and main switch is pushed again. When the cruisewarning light for the front passenger. supplemental restraint system” section of this main switch indicator light comes on, the cruiseRefer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat manual. control system is operational.belts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.2-18 Instruments and controls
    • Cruise set switch indicator 4WD shift indicator light High beam indicator light light (if so equipped) ( model) (blue)The light comes on while the vehicle speed is The light should turn off within 1 second after This blue light comes on when the headlight highcontrolled by the cruise control system. If the light placing the ignition switch in the ON position. beams are on and goes out when the low beamsblinks while the engine is running, it may indicate are selected.the cruise control system is not functioning prop- While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- cator light will illuminate the position selected by The high beam indicator light also comes onerly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN the 4WD shift switch. when the passing signal is activated.dealer. Electronic locking rear The 4WD shift indicator light may blink Hill descent control system on while shifting from one drive mode to the indicator light (if so equipped) differential (E-Lock) system on other. indicator light (if so equipped) Front passenger air bag status When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on briefly and then turnsThis light comes on when the electronic locking light off.rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fullyengaged. The front passenger air bag status light ( ) The light comes on when the hill descent control will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be system is activated.The indicator light flashes when the system is first OFF depending on how the front passenger seat If the hill descent control switch is on and theturned on. When the system fully engages, the is being used. indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.light remains on. If the switch is on and theindicator light continues to flash, the system is For front passenger air bag status light operation, If the indicator light does not come on or blinknot engaged. see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in when the hill descent switch is on, the system the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental may not be functioning properly. Have the systemFor additional information, see “Electronic lock- restraint system” section of this manual. checked by a NISSAN dealer.ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” laterin this section and “Electronic locking rear differ- For additional information, see “Hill descent con-ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv- trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descenting” section of this manual. control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- tion of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-19
    • ● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An Malfunction Indicator Light CAUTION emission control system malfunction has (MIL) been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If Continued vehicle operation without hav- the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten ing the emission control system checkedIf this indicator light comes on steady or blinks and repaired as necessary could lead to or install the cap and continue to drive thewhile the engine is running, it may indicate a poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,potential emission control malfunction. vehicle. The light should turn off after and possible damage to the emission con- a few driving trips. If the light does not trol system.The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come turn off after a few driving trips, have theon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You Overdrive OFF indicator lightor if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make do not need to have your vehicle towed tosure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed (A/T models only) the dealer.tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons ● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An This light comes on when the overdrive function(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. engine misfire has been detected which may is OFF.After a few driving trips, the light should damage the emission control system. To re- The automatic transmission overdrive function isturn off if no other potential emission control duce or avoid emission control system dam- controlled by the overdrive switch.system malfunction exists. age: See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting andIf this indicator light comes on steady for 20 – do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH driving” section of this manual.seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when (72 km/h).the engine is not running, it indicates that the Security indicator light (if sovehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. equipped)tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi- – avoid steep uphill grades.ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the“Technical and consumer information” section of – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo OFF, LOCK or ACC position. The blinking secu-this manual. being hauled or towed. rity indicator light indicates that the security sys- The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking tems equipped on the vehicle are operational.Operation and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected For additional information, see “Security sys-The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have tems” later in this section.one of two ways: your vehicle towed to the dealer.2-20 Instruments and controls
    • If the light does not go off after performing the When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow the Slip indicator light for models reset procedure, have the traction control system instructions below: with ABLS (if so equipped) checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● For automatic transmission models, stop theThis indicator light comes on if the active brake Transfer 4LO position indicator vehicle and shift the shift selector to the Nlimited slip is activated. If activated, the system (Neutral) position with the brake pedal de-will apply braking to the slipping drive wheel(s), light ( model) pressed, then depress and turn the 4WDgiving the non-slipping wheel(s) more traction. The light should turn off within 1 second after shift switch to 4LO or 4H. Slip indicator light for models turning the ignition switch to ON. ● For manual transmission models, stop the with VDC (if so equipped) This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch in (Neutral) position with the clutch pedal de-This indicator light will blink when the traction the ON position. pressed, then depress and turn the 4WDcontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery shift switch to 4LO or 4H.road conditions may exist if the slip indicator The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theblinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving switch while driving. You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchaccordingly. Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch and shift the shift selector to the N position withThe slip indicator light also comes on when you to 4LO. the brake pedal (AT models) or clutch pedal (MTturn the ignition key to the ON position. The light models) depressed.will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is The indicator light may blink while shiftingoperational. If the light does not come on or does from one drive mode to the other. Turn signal/hazard indicatornot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer. The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and lights remain illuminated or turn off before shifting theIf the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- transmission into gear. If the shift selector is The appropriate light flashes when the turn signaltion control system is disabled and the slip indi- shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other switch is activated.cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, thethe ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned vehicle may move unexpectedly.To reset the system, you must perform the reset on.procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-21
    • Vehicle Dynamic Control the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Key reminder chime Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv- (VDC) OFF indicator light (if so ing” section of this manual. A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove equipped) If the light does not go off after performing the the key and take it with you when leaving theThis indicator light comes on when the Vehicle reset procedure, have the traction control system vehicle.Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the checked by a NISSAN dealer. Light reminder chimetransfer case is in the 4LO position ( While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system ismodel), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-system is not functioning properly. This indicates tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is the system working when starting the vehicle orthe Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper- opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. accelerating, but this is normal.ating. Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC ing the vehicle.Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch light will illuminate when the electronic lockingagain or restart the engine and the system will rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if sooperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or thetion of this manual. switch is turned off, the VDC system will beThe Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on enabled and the VDC light will turn off.when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. AUDIBLE REMINDERSThe light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on or Brake pad wear warningcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when theIf the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve- vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakehicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and the pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked asVDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec- soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition. To reset the system, you must perform2-22 Instruments and controls
    • SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped) The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot Keyfob operation: prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- ● Push the button on the keyfob. ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a All doors lock. The hazard lights flash brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, twice and the horn beeps once to indicate and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be all doors are locked. aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. ● When the button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash Many devices offering additional protection, such twice and the horn beeps once as a re- as component locks, identification markers, and minder that the doors are already locked. tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer The horn may or may not beep. Refer to may also offer such equipment. Check with your “Silencing the horn beep feature” in the insurance company to see if you may be eligible “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- LIC0359 for discounts for various theft protection features. tion later in this manual.Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems: How to arm the vehicle security 4. Confirm that the indicator light comes system on. The light stays on for about 30 ● Vehicle security system (if so equipped) seconds. The vehicle security system is now 1. Close all windows. (The system can be ● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so armed even if the windows are open.) pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve- equipped) hicle security system automatically shifts 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. into the armed phase. The light beginsVEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during theequipped) can be locked with the key, power door lock 30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sThe vehicle security system provides visual and switch (if the door is opened, locked and door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, oraudible alarm signals if someone opens the doors then closed), or with the keyfob. the ignition switch is placed in ACC or ONwhen the system is armed. It is not, however, a position, the system will not arm.motion detection-type system that activateswhen a vehicle is moved or when a vibrationoccurs. Instruments and controls 2-23
    • ● If the key is turned slowly when locking The alarm is activated by: 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. the driver’s door, the system may not ● opening a door without using the key or 4. Restart the engine while holding the device arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using (which may have caused the interference) beyond the vertical position toward the the inside lock knob or the power door lock separate from the registered key. unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key switch). If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- is removed. If the indicator light fails to ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door How to stop an activated alarm rate key ring to avoid interference from other once and lock it again. The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s devices. ● Even when the driver and/or passen- door with the key or by pressing the button Statement related to Section 15 of FCC gers are in the vehicle, the system will on the keyfob. Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- arm with all doors closed and locked tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT with the ignition switch placed in the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ASSY — IMMOBILIZER) OFF position. SYSTEM (if so equipped) This device complies with part 15 of theVehicle security system activation The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry allow the engine to start without the use of a Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-The vehicle security system will give the following registered key. ing two conditions;alarm: If the engine fails to start using a registered key (1) This device may not cause harmful in- ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds (for example, when interference is caused by terference, and (2) this device must accept intermittently. any interference received, including inter- another registered key, an automated toll road ● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- device or automatic payment device on the key ference that may cause undesired opera- proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm ring), restart the engine using the following pro- tion of the device. reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with cedures: CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- the driver’s door with the key or by pressing 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD the button on the keyfob. VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK ATE THE EQUIPMENT. position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.2-24 Instruments and controls
    • WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Push the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera- 4 tion (MIST) of the wiper. Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the 5 washer. The wiper will also operate several times. WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. CAUTION LIC0474 WIC0854 ● Do not operate the washer continu-Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION ously for more than 30 seconds.The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. voir tank is empty.position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve- Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the ● Do not fill the window washer reservoirhicle Immobilizer System is operational. following speed: tank with washer fluid concentrates atIf the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- full strength. Some methyl alcoholfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ᭺ 1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation based washer fluid concentrates mayignition switch is placed in the ON position. can be adjusted by turning the knob toward permanently stain the grille if spilledIf the light still remains on and/or the en- ᭺ (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). A B while filling the window washer reser- voir tank.gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for ᭺ 2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operationNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring all ᭺ 3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera- tionregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service. Instruments and controls 2-25
    • REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so SWITCH equipped)● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water. LIC1419 WIC1424 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH push the rear window defroster switch on. The Lighting rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn ᭺ 1 When turning the switch to the posi- the defroster off. tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and The rear window defroster automatically turns off instrument panel lights come on. after approximately 15 minutes. ᭺ 2 When turning the switch to the posi- tion, the headlights come on and all the other CAUTION lights remain on. When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster.2-26 Instruments and controls
    • WIC1452 WIC1426 WIC1453 Type B Type C Autolight system (if so equipped) CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights to beUse the headlights with the engine run- set so they turn on and off automatically. Thening to avoid discharging the vehicle autolight system can:battery. ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark. ● Turn off all the lights when it is light. ● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed. Instruments and controls 2-27
    • To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- tion ᭺. 1 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for 5 minutes. If another door isopened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to LIC0835 WIC1427the OFF, , or position. Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select the autolight sensor ᭺ located in the top 1 side of the instrument panel. The autolight ᭺ 1 To select the high beam function, push the sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates. dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine ᭺ 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. off and the switch in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged. ᭺ 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.2-28 Instruments and controls
    • After the headlights automatically turn off with the If the parking brake is applied before the engine isheadlight switch in the or position, started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF position the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchand then turned to the or position. is placed in the OFF position. CAUTION WARNINGEven though the battery saver feature au- When the daytime running light system istomatically turns off the headlights after a active, tail lights on your vehicle are notperiod of time, you should turn the head- on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourlight switch to the OFF position when the headlights. Failure to do so could causeengine is not running to avoid discharging an accident injuring yourself and others.the vehicle battery. WIC0917DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only) INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROLThe headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started with The instrument brightness control operates whenthe parking brake released. The daytime running the headlight control switch is in the AUTO (if solights operate with the headlight switch in the equipped), or position.OFF position or in the position. Turn the Turn the control ᭺ to adjust the brightness of the Aheadlight switch to the position for full instrument panel lights when driving at night.illumination when driving at night. Instruments and controls 2-29
    • HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH WIC1428 LIC0393 LIC0394TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi-Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch tions. All turn signal lights flash. to the position, then turn the fog light᭺1 Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position. WARNING turning direction. When the turn is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head- move the vehicle well off the road.Lane change signal lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to ● Do not use the hazard warning flashers᭺2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or the position. while moving on the highway unless down to the point where the indicator light To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch unusual circumstances force you to begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. to the OFF position. drive so slowly that your vehicle might The headlights must be on and the low beams become a hazard to other traffic. selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam ● Turn signals do not work when the haz- headlights are selected. ard warning flasher lights are on.2-30 Instruments and controls
    • HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCHThe flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving. WIC1449 LIC0616 To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch down To sound the horn, push the area between the to the ON position. horn icons on the steering wheel. CAUTION WARNING Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so position when you leave the vehicle for could affect proper operation of the extended periods of time, otherwise the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- battery will go dead. pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Instruments and controls 2-31
    • HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) CAUTION ● Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. ● Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. ● Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. LIC1041 ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat WIC0534 should be removed immediately with a The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleThe front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. dry cloth. Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- 1. Start the engine. ● When cleaning the seat, never use ing conditions. gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as lar materials. desired, depending on the temperature. The system reduces the engine output to reduce indicator light in the switch will illuminate. ● If any abnormalities are found or the wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced heated seat does not operate, turn the even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If The heater is controlled by a thermostat, switch off and have the system checked maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck automatically turning the heater on and off. by your NISSAN dealer. vehicle, turn the VDC system off. The indicator light will remain on as long as ● The battery could run down if the seat To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF the switch is on. heater is operated while the engine is switch. The indicator will come on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you not running. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control off. (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.2-32 Instruments and controls
    • HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (ifso equipped) ● The hill descent control may not control ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position the vehicle speed on a hill under all load and the vehicle speed must be under 21 or road conditions. Always be prepared mph (35 km/h), and to depress the brake pedal to control ● the hill descent control system switch must vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re- be ON. sult in a collision or serious personal injury. The hill descent control system on indicator light will come on when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent CAUTION control system applies the brakes to control ve- When the hill descent control system op- hicle speed. erates continuously for a long time, the If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed temperature of the brake pads may in- while the hill descent control system is on, the crease and the hill descent control system system will stop operating temporarily. As soon LIC0743 may be temporarily disabled (the indicator as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the light will blink). If the indicator light does WARNING hill descent control system begins to function not come on continuously after blinking, again if the hill descent control operating condi-● Never rely solely on the hill descent stop using the system. tions are fulfilled. control system to control vehicle speed The hill descent control system is designed to when driving on steep downhill grades. The hill descent control system on indicator light reduce driver workload when going down steep blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for Always drive carefully when using the hills. The hill descent control system helps to system activation are not met or if the system hill descent control system and decel- erate the vehicle speed by depressing control vehicle speed so the driver can concen- becomes disengaged for any reason. the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe- trate on steering the vehicle. To turn off the hill descent control system, push cially careful when driving on frozen, To activate the hill descent control system: the switch to the OFF position. muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position For additional information, see “Hill descent con- may result in a loss of control of the and the vehicle speed must be under 15 trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec- vehicle and possible serious injury or mph (25 km/h) or tion and “Hill descent control system” in the death. “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-33
    • ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped) When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi- ● Use the E-Lock system only when free- cator light will flash until the system engages. ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position However, if all operation conditions listed above before using the E-Lock system. Never are not met or the system becomes disengaged, use the E-Lock system on a slippery the indicator light will continue to flash. road surface such as snow or ice sur- The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled face. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock cause unexpected movement of the ve- system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control hicle during engine braking, accelerat- (VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light ing or turning, which may result in an illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON. accident and serious personal injury. See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and Driving” section for CAUTION further explanation and system limitations. ● After using the E-Lock system, turn the LIC0729The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) switch OFF to prevent possible damage WARNING to driveline components from extendedsystem can help provide added traction if thevehicle is stuck or becoming stuck. ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON use. when driving on paved or hard-surfaced ● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)To activate the E-Lock system: roads. Turning the vehicle may result in when the system is engaged. Doing so ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position the rear wheels slipping and result in an could result in possible damage to the (4-wheel drive vehicles), accident and personal injury. After us- driveline. ing the E-Lock system to free the ve- ● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 hicle, turn the system OFF. ● Do not turn on the E-lock system while mph (7 km/h) or less, and the tires are spinning. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. ● the E-Lock system switch must be turned ON.2-34 Instruments and controls
    • CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start) POWER OUTLETSWITCH (if so equipped) To use the clutch interlock switch: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot. 3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal and release the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 5. Press and release the clutch interlock switch. The CANCEL light on the switch will illuminate. 6. Turn the ignition to the START position to start the engine and, at the same time, de- WIC0817 press the accelerator pedal with your right LIC1430 foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take Front row WARNING your left foot off the brake. Once the engine The power outlets are for powering electricalPay special attention to your surround- has started, the clutch interlock switch accessories such as cellular telephones.ings when using the clutch interlock CANCEL light shuts off. Do not use theswitch. The vehicle will move forward or interlock switch to start the engine under The bottom power outlet located on instrumentbackward according to the gear selected. normal driving conditions. panel is powered directly by the vehicle’s battery. The power outlet located inside the center con-The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allows sole is powered only when the ignition switch is infor starting the engine without depressing the the ACC or ON position.clutch pedal. This feature helps you restart theengine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For Open the cap to use a power outlet.example, the engine stops on a steep hill and aslight movement forward or backward might bedangerous.) Instruments and controls 2-35
    • STORAGE ● Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. ● Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. ● Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature LIC0761 fuse may open. LIC1539 Center console ● When not in use, be sure to close the Top center tray cap. Do not allow water to contact the STORAGE TRAYS CAUTION outlet.● The outlet and plug may be hot during WARNING or immediately after use. Do not place sharp objects in the trays to● Only certain power outlets are designed help prevent injury in an accident or sud- for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do den stop. not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information.● Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.2-36 Instruments and controls
    • LIC0818 WIC1431 WIC1432AT model MT model — Type A (if so equipped) MT model — Type B (if so equipped) Instruments and controls 2-37
    • UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● The cargo restrained in the under-seat storage bins must not exceed the weight limits listed below or the bins may not stay secured. In a sudden stop or collision, the unsecured bins could cause personal inury. King cab model: 16 lb (7.25 kg) Crew cab model Driver’s side: 16 lb (7.25 kg) Passenger’s side: 25 lb (11.33 kg) ● If the under-seat storage bins are re- moved for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from LIC0821 LIC0820 causing injury to passengers or damage 2nd row under-seat storage bin 2nd row under-seat storage bin to the vehicle in case of sudden braking (King cab model) (Crew cab model) or an accident.2-38 Instruments and controls
    • ● Do not place sharp objects in the under- seat storage bins. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is involved in a collision.To access the under-seat storage bins:For King cab model, lift up the jump seat. Refer to“Jump seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section earlier inthis manual.For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat.Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- LIC0822 LIC0766straint system” section earlier in this manual. To remove the under-seat storage bins: CONSOLE BOX 1. Remove the storage net. Pull up on the lever ᭺ to open the console box lid 1 2. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the stor- ᭺. 2 age bin (King cab model). 3. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position ᭺. 2 To install the under-seat storage bins: 1. Position the under-seat storage bin so the holes line up with the holes in the floorboard. 2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the LOCK position ᭺. 1 Instruments and controls 2-39
    • CAUTION ● Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. LIC0768 WIC0673GLOVE BOX SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if soTo open the top portion of the glove box, push the equipped)latch ᭺ up and raise the lid. A To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.To open the lower portion of the glove box, pullthe handle ᭺ down and lower the lid. B WARNING ● Keep the sunglasses holder closed WARNING while driving to prevent an accident.Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.2-40 Instruments and controls
    • WIC0824 LIC0826 LIC0825MAP POCKETS King cab model Crew cab model Instruments and controls 2-41
    • CAUTION ● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. ● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. LIC0575 WIC0827SEAT POCKET (if so equipped) FrontA pocket is located on the back of the driver’s CUP HOLDERSseat. The front cup holders have adapters that can be removed to accommodate larger cups. WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.2-42 Instruments and controls
    • WIC0771 LIC0784 WIC0828 2nd row (rear of front console) Bottle holder (front row) Bottle holder (2nd row, Crew cab)To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front CAUTIONconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. Ifstepped on, the cup holder is designed to snap ● Do not use bottle holder for any otherloose from the console. To re-install, close the objects that could be thrown about incup holder assembly and push it back into the the vehicle and possibly injure peopleconsole opening. during sudden braking or an accident.To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first close ● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidthe cup holder. containers. Instruments and controls 2-43
    • ROOF RACK (if so equipped) WARNING ● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack. ● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or abnor- mal handling maneuvers. ● Roof rack load should be evenly distributed. ● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. WIC0857 CAUTION Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort- ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or stool.2-44 Instruments and controls
    • WINDOWSAlways evenly distribute the cargo on the tubular To remove: POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)roof rack. The maximum total load is 125 lb 1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the(56 kg) evenly distributed. Be careful that your Torxdriver ᭺ by turning counterclockwise 1 WARNINGvehicle does not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle ᭺. A ● Make sure that all passengers haveWeight Ratings (GAWR front and rear). The 2. Rotate the clamps ᭺. C their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing theGVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. 3. Remove the crossbar. windows. Use the window lock switchlabel (located on the driver’s side door jamb to prevent unexpected use of the powerpillar). For more information regarding GVWR 4. Reverse to install. windows.and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” 5. Always check the tightness of the crossbarin the “Technical and consumer information” sec- adjusting screws. ● Do not leave children unattended insidetion later in this manual. the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- If you hear wind noise coming from the roof rack tivate switches or controls and becomeThe front crossbar can be adjusted or removed. while driving, adjust the roof rack crossbar to the trapped in a window. Unattended chil-Use the Torxdriver provided in the tool kit to neutral position, rearward of ⌬ on the side rails. dren could become involved in seriousloosen both crossbar adjusting screws. accidents.To adjust: The power windows operate when the ignition 1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the switch is placed in the ON position, or for about Torxdriver ᭺ by turning counterclockwise 1 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s ᭺. A door is opened during this period of about 45 2. When the clamp is loosened, move the seconds, power to the windows is canceled. crossbar so the cargo can be positioned on the crossbar ᭺. B 3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws with the Torxdriver by turning clockwise. 4. Secure the cargo with rope. 5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar adjusting screws. Instruments and controls 2-45
    • Driver’s side power window switch The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows. To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch. LIC1329 LIC07861. Window lock button Front passenger’s power window2. Power door lock switch switch3. Front passenger side window switch The passenger’s window switch operates only4. Right rear passenger window switch the corresponding passenger’s window. To open (Crew Cab models only) the window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺. 15. Left rear passenger window switch To close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.2 (Crew Cab models only)6. Driver’s side automatic switch2-46 Instruments and controls
    • LIC0787 LIC0410 WIC0263Rear power window switch (Crew Automatic operation MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)Cab models only) To fully open a window equipped with automatic The side windows can be opened or closed byThe rear power window switches open or close operation, press the window switch down to the turning the hand crank on each door.only the corresponding passenger window. To second detent and release it; it need not be held.open the window, push the switch and hold it The window automatically opens all the way. Todown ᭺. To close the window, push the switch 1 stop the window, lift the switch up while theup ᭺. 2 window is opening.Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction. Instruments and controls 2-47
    • MOONROOF (if so equipped) Tilting the moonroof Close the moonroof by pushing the switch to- ward UP/CLOSE ᭺. Release the switch, then 2 push the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the moonroof up. To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch to- ward DOWN/OPEN ᭺. 1 Restarting the moonroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality WIC0856 WIC0882 detected. Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal.REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so Sliding the moonroofequipped) To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to- 1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting switch repeatedly toward theSqueeze the handles of the lever ᭺, then slide 1 ward DOWN/OPEN ᭺. 1 DOWN/OPEN ᭺ position to fully close the 1the window open ᭺. 2 To fully close the moonroof, push the switch lid. toward UP/CLOSE ᭺. 2 2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more To open or close the moonroof part way, push the than 2 seconds toward the DOWN/OPEN switch in any direction while the moonroof is ᭺ position to reestablish the lid’s home 1 sliding to stop it in the desired position. position. The moonroof should now operate normally.2-48 Instruments and controls
    • SunshadeAuto-reverse function (when closing or When tilting down:tilting down the moonroof) If the control unit detects something caught in the Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- ward or backward.The auto-reverse function can be activated when moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- mediately tilt up. If the moonroof does not closematic operation when the ignition switch is If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re- Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair theplaced in the ON position or for about 45 sec- peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep moonroof.onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF pushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsposition. after it happens; the moonroof will fully closeDepending on the environment or driving gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in theconditions, the auto-reverse function may moonroof.be activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroof WARNINGoccurs. ● In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. WARNING Always use seat belts and childThere are some small distances immedi- restraints.ately before the closed position which ● Do not allow anyone to stand up orcannot be detected. Make sure that all extend any portion of their body out ofpassengers have their hands, etc., inside the moonroof opening while the vehiclethe vehicle before closing the moonroof. is in motion or while the moonroof isWhen closing: closing.If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof CAUTIONwill immediately open backward. ● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening. ● Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area. Instruments and controls 2-49
    • INTERIOR LIGHTS LIC0789 LIC0792 LIC0630 Type A Type B Type CThe interior lights have a three-position switch When the switch is in the O position ᭺, the 2 The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer isand operate regardless of ignition switch posi- interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds activated when:tion. when: ● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, aWhen the switch is in the ON position ᭺, the 1 ● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key key, or the power door lock switch.interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi- or the power door lock switch while all doorstion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes are closed and the ignition switch is in the ● The ignition switch is turned ON.unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON OFF position. The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-position. ● The driver’s door is opened and then closed utes while doors are open to prevent the battery while the key is removed from the ignition from becoming discharged. switch. When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺, the 3 ● The key is removed from the ignition switch interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door while all doors are closed. position.2-50 Instruments and controls
    • MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a CAUTION convenient way to consolidate the functions of upDo not use for extended periods of time to three individual hand-held transmitters intowith the engine stopped. This could result one built-in device.in a discharged battery. HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver: ● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and se- curity systems. ● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- LIC0791 nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program- ming. To turn the map lights on, press the lenses. To turn them off, press the lenses of the lights again. Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- CAUTION mitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon Do not use for extended periods of time sale of the vehicle, the programmed with the engine stopped. This could result HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons in a discharged battery. should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Program- ming HomeLinkா” later in this section. Instruments and controls 2-51
    • WARNING● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- WIC0986 WIC0987 creases the risk of serious injury or death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to● During the programming procedure 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer program and the hand-held transmitter but- your garage door or security gate will HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory) ton. open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light ᭺ blinks (after 20 1 within range). Make sure that people or seconds). Release both buttons. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has objects are clear of the garage door, 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter been completed. gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkா surface. light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing off while programming the HomeLinkா from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing Universal Transceiver. blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- ing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other pro-2-52 Instruments and controls
    • grammed device, press and hold the pro- ton, quickly and firmly press and release the NOTE: grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed. When programming a garage door opener, when the device begins to activate. Press and release the HomeLinkா button up etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur- to 3 times to complete the training. 5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos- rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro- sible damage to the garage door opener HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code” grammed. (To program the remaining components. garage door opener signal. You will need to HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or proceed with the next steps to train the gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.) OPERATING THE HOMELINKா HomeLinkா to complete the programming UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER which may require a ladder and another per- NOTE: The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro- son for convenience. Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- 6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- “clear” all previously programmed rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- gram button located on the garage door HomeLinkா buttons. propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal opener’s motor to activate the “training Transceiver button. The red indicator light will If you have any questions or are having difficulty illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. mode”. This button is usually located near programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- or call 1-800-355-3515. DIAGNOSIS light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-NOTE: CANADIAN CUSTOMERS held transmitter information: Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteriesOnce you have pressed and released the held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- with new batteries.program button on the garage door open- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toer’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you ● position the hand-held transmitter with its HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold thehave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. battery area facing away from the HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-Use the help of a second person for conve- HomeLinkா surface. gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-nience to assist when performing this step. press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every ● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ing the garage door opener’s program but- (indicating successful programming). ruption. Instruments and controls 2-53
    • ● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 2. When the indicator light begins to flash FCC Notice: inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the slowly (after 20 seconds), position the This device complies with FCC rules part 15 HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera- that position for up to 15 seconds. If mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface. tion is subject to the following two condi- HomeLinkா is not programmed within that tions: 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter time, try holding the transmitter in another button. (1) This device may not cause harmful in- position – keeping the indicator light in view at all times. 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first terference and (2) This device must accept slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator any interference that may be received, in-If you continue to have programming difficulties, cluding interference that may cause undes- light begins to flash rapidly, release bothplease contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs ired operation. buttons.Department. The phone numbers are located in This transmitter has been tested and com-the Foreword of this manual. The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. now been reprogrammed. The new device can Changes or modifications not expressly ap-CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button proved by the party responsible for compli-INFORMATION that was just programmed. This procedure will ance could void the user’s authority to op-Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா erate the equipment.to clear all programming, press and hold the two buttons. DOC: ISTC 1763K1313outside buttons and release when the indicator IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds). FCC I.D. CV2V67690 If your vehicle is stolen, you should change theREPROGRAMMING A SINGLE codes of any non-rolling code device that hasHOMELINKா BUTTON been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalbutton, complete the following. information. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but- When your vehicle is recovered, you will ton. Do not release the button until step 4 need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer- has been completed. sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.2-54 Instruments and controls
    • 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Tilt operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Locking with power door lock switch Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Rear doors (King Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-6 Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Bed Extender (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Tie down hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
    • KEYS A key number is only necessary when you have Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate of registration will no longer be able to start your from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer vehicle. can duplicate it. Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with salt water. This could affect system SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) function. You can only drive your vehicle using the master key which is registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. This key has a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. LPD0348 Never leave these keys in the vehicle. 1. Two master keys (black) with transponder Additional or replacement keys: chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side. If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle 2. Transponder chip Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli- 3. Key number plate cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedA key number plate is supplied with your keys. with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANRecord the key number and keep the plate in a Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have tosafe place (such as your wallet), not in the ve- your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-hicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer cause the registration process will erase thefor duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN memory of all key codes previously registereddoes not record key numbers so it is very impor- into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.tant to keep track of your key number plate. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • DOORSWhen the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors. WARNING● Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and will help keep out WPD0311 LPD0240 intruders. Driver’s side Power (if so equipped)● Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or● Do not leave children unattended inside Manual (if so equipped) unlock all doors at the same time. the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle 1 tivate switches or controls. Unattended vehicle ᭺. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear 1 locks all doors. children could become involved in seri- ous accidents. ᭺. 2 Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the 2 vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can 3 only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors ᭺. 4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
    • Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open, all doors will lock and then unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle. LPD0298 WPD0381 Inside lock Door lock switchLOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCKING WITH POWER DOORKNOB LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)To lock the door without the key, move the inside To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the 1 lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) todoor. the lock position ᭺. When locking the door this 1To unlock the door without the key, move the way, be certain not to leave the key inside theinside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺. 2 vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to the unlock position ᭺. 23-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • LPD0278 LPD0312 WPD0313REAR DOORS (King Cab models) 2. From the outside, pull the door handle ᭺ A 3. Open the door to the desired position. toward you.1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped) ● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). ● For automatic transmission models: All doors unlock automatically when the trans- mission is placed in the P (Park) position. ● For manual transmission models: All doors unlock automatically when the key is re- moved from the ignition switch. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
    • REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped)The automatic lock and unlock functions WARNINGcan be deactivated or activated indepen-dently of each other. To deactivate or activate ● Radio waves could adversely affectthe automatic door lock or unlock system, per- electric medical equipment. Those whoform the following procedure: use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac- 1. Close all doors. turer for the possible influences before 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. use. 3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of ● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans- performing Step #2: mits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises radio waves ● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings: may affect aircraft navigation and com- push and hold the power door lock switch munication systems. Do not operate the to the position (UNLOCK) for more remote keyless entry keyfob while on than 5 seconds. WPD0314 an airplane. Make sure the buttons are ● To change AUTO LOCK settings: push CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK not operated unintentionally when the and hold the power door lock switch to (Crew Cab models only) unit is stored for a flight the position (LOCK) for more It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors than 5 seconds. interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by from being opened accidentally, especially when 4. When activated, the hazard warning lights small children are in the vehicle. using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. will flash twice. When deactivated, the haz- Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the ard warning lights will flash once. before locking the doors. edge of the rear doors. 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the When the lever is in the lock position, the The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- OFF and ON position again between each door can be opened only from the outside. mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective setting change. distance depends on the conditions around the vehicle.3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one ● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedvehicle. For information concerning the purchase period in an area where temperaturesand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN exceed 140°F (60°C).dealer. ● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyThe keyfob will not function when: holder that contains a magnet. ● the battery is discharged ● Do not place the keyfob near equip- ment that produces a magnetic field, ● the distance between the vehicle and the such as a TV, audio equipment and per- keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m) sonal computers.The panic alarm will not activate when the If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-key is in the ignition switch. ommends erasing the ID code of that key- fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- CAUTION authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For LPD0209Listed below are conditions or occur- information regarding the erasing proce-rences which will damage the keyfob: dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM● Do not allow the keyfob, which contains electrical components, to come into Locking doors contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. 1. Close all windows.● Do not drop the keyfob. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against 3. Close the hood and all doors. another object. 4. Press the button on the keyfob. All● Do not change or modify the keyfob. the doors lock. The hazard warning lights● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the flash twice and the horn beeps once to keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until indicate all doors are locked. it is completely dry. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
    • ● When the button is pressed with Press the button on the keyfob again all doors locked, the hazard warning lights within 5 seconds. flash twice and the horn beeps once as a ● All doors unlock. reminder that the doors are already locked. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed. ● If a door is open and you press the button, the doors will lock The interior lights can be turned off without wait- but the horn will not beep and the hazard ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the lights will not flash. ignition switch and placing the ignition switch in the ON or START position, locking the doors withThe horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silenc- the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch toing the horn beep feature” in this section for the OFF position.details. Auto relock LPD0210 When the button on the keyfob is pressed, Unlocking doors all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute Press the button on the keyfob once. unless one of the following operations is per- formed: ● Only the driver’s door unlocks. ● Any door is opened. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and switch in any position except the ON posi- the switch is cycled from OFF to ON. tion. ● The interior lights illuminate for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the normal operation position.3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si- lence the horn if the alarm is triggered. Using the interior lights Press the button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section in this manual. LPD0211 LPD0262Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep featureIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the keyfob.by pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds.The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has beenThe panic alarm stops when: deactivated. ● it has run for 25 seconds, or To activate: Press and hold the ● any button is pressed on the keyfob. and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
    • HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR WARNING ● Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ● If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood. LPD0302 LPD0263᭺1 Pull the hood lock release handle located FUEL-FILLER CAP below the driver’s side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn᭺2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are side as illustrated with your fingertips and heard. raise the hood.᭺3 Insert the support rod into the slot on the underside of the hood.When closing the hood, return the hood rod to itsoriginal position. Lower the hood approximately12 inch (30 cm) above the latch and release it.This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • ● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the – Always place the container on the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any ground when filling. “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel – Do not use electronic devices when from spraying out and possibly causing filling. personal injury. Then remove the cap. – Keep the pump nozzle in contact ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank with the container while you are fill- after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off ing it. automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel – Use only approved portable fuel con- spray and possibly a fire. tainers for flammable liquid. ● Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper LPD0325 operation of the fuel system and emis-Loop the tether strap around the hook ᭺ while 1 sion control system. An incorrect caprefueling. can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the WARNING malfunction indicator light to come on.● Gasoline is extremely flammable and ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to highly explosive under certain condi- attempt to start your vehicle. tions. You could be burned or seriously ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in injured if it is misused or mishandled. the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity Always stop the engine and do not can cause an explosion of flammable smoke or allow open flames or sparks liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or near the vehicle when refueling. trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
    • STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS CAUTION● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.● Insert cap straight into the fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel- filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the LPD0304 cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a TILT OPERATION (if so equipped) few driving trips. If the light Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi- does not turn off after a few driving tion. trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place.● For additional information, see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in WARNING WPD0315 the “Instruments and Controls” section Do not adjust the steering wheel while ᭺ 1 To block glare from the front, swing down the in this manual. main sun visor. driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ᭺ 2 To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side.3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • MIRRORS᭺3 Slide the sun visor extension (if so equipped) in or out as needed. CAUTION● Do not store the sun visor before return- ing the extension to its original position.● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- edly downward. WPD0307 WPD0126 VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped) REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor The night position ᭺ reduces glare from the 1 down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity headlights of vehicles behind you at night. mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the Use the day position ᭺ when driving in daylight 2 mirror cover is open. hours. WARNING Use the night position only when neces- sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
    • To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press the button again. The indicator light will turn on. For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. For information on the compass and outside tem- perature display, see “Compass and outside temperature display” in the “Instruments and con- trols” section of this manual. NOTE: WPD0333 WPD0170 Do not hang any objects over the sensorsAUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE ᭺ or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. 2 Manual control type (if so equipped)REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the The outside mirror can be moved in any direction sensors, resulting in improper operation.The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- for a better rear view.cally dims according to the intensity of the head- OUTSIDE MIRRORSlights of the vehicle following you. The automaticanti-glare feature operates only when the ignition WARNINGswitch is in the ON position. ● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onThe indicator light ᭺ will illuminate when the 1 the passenger side are closer than theyautomatic anti-glare feature is operating. appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could causeTo turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press an accident. Use the inside mirror orthe button. The indicator light will turn off. glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • TRUCK BOX LPD0237 LPD0259 LPD0270Electric control type (if so equipped) Foldable outside mirrors TAILGATEThe outside mirror remote control will operate Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Opening the tailgateonly when the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position. Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgateMove the small switch ᭺ to select the right or left 1 open.mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch ᭺.2 When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches are securely locked.Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgateSome outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Beddefog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi- Extender (accessory) or equivalent in thetional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and extended position.controls” section of this manual. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
    • For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loading Installing the tailgateinformation” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual. 1. Insert the tailgate into the left side hinge. 2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and WARNING insert into the right side hinge.● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a 3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli- angle and attach the tailgate support cables. sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or 4. Close the tailgate securely. killed.● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a LPD0271 seat and using a seat belt properly. Removing the tailgate 1. Release the tailgate support cables. CAUTION ● The tailgate is heavy. Two people should remove or install it. Be careful not to drop it during removal. ● After releasing the support cables, do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper. 2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle. 3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side hinge. 4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side hinge.3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • BED EXTENDER (if so equipped) CAUTION ● Do not overload the bed extender. Maximum load on the open tailgate is 890N (200 lbs). ● Evenly distribute and properly secure all cargo. ● Do not use the bed extender or tailgate to secure cargo. LPD0272 LPD0480Locking the tailgate Positioning the bed extenderTo lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the pas- To use the bed extender in the inward positionsenger side of the vehicle ᭺. To unlock, turn the 1 perform the following:key toward the driver side ᭺. 2 1. Rotate the bed extender ᭺ toward the cab 1 of the truck. 2. Close the tailgate. 3. Place cargo inside the bed extender in the truck bed. 4. Properly secure the cargo. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
    • NOTE: Use care when rotating extender, buckles may come in contact with the truck bed railing. Removing and installing the bed extender To remove or install the bed extender perform the following: 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical posi- tion and lift straight up (to remove) or lower LPD0479 straight down (to install). LTI0102To use the bed extender in the outward position To store the bed extender in the front of the truck TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)perform the following: when not in use perform the following: For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed 1. Open the tailgate. 1. Position the sliding brackets past the center at each corner of the truck box. These may be of the wheel well. used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck 2. Rotate the bed extender ᭺ away from the 2 cab of the truck until the extender sits on the 2. Re-install the extender into the brackets (see box. tailgate. above). ● The weight of the cargo load must be evenly 3. Lock the buckles ᭺ into the tailgate latch. 3 3. Rotate the extender to the inward position. distributed over both the front and the rear axles.The bed extender can be adjusted in the outward 4. Push the brackets forward until the extenderposition by moving the extender along the rail. comes in contact with the front wall of the ● All cargo should be securely fastened with truck box. ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle.3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • WARNING● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
    • MEMO3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
    • 4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phonesystemsVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) playerHeater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A). . . . . . . . . . 4-2 (Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-6 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Steering wheel switch for audio control Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B). . . . . . . . . 4-10 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Radio (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
    • VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (Type A) WARNING ● The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running. ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to LHA0534 people or animals.Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas- ● Do not use the recirculation mode forsenger’s side windows ᭺, driver and passenger 1 long periods as it may cause the interior᭺, or center ᭺ vent by moving the vent slide 2 3 air to become stale and the windows toand/or vent assemblies. fog up.4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • — Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. WHA1384 Type A Air recirculation button1. Fan control dial Air flow control dial ON position:2. Temperature control dial The air flow control dial allows you to select the Push the air recirculation button to recir-3. Air flow control dial culate air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on air flow outlets.4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped) MAX — Air flows from center and side the button will come on.5. Air recirculation button A/C vents with maximum cooling (air Push the button to the on position:CONTROLS conditioning). ● when driving on a dusty road.Fan control dial — Air flows from center and side vents. ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and — Air flows from center and side senger compartment.controls fan speed. vents and the front and rear floor ● for maximum cooling when using the air con- outlets. ditioner. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
    • OFF position: HEATER OPERATION 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-Push the air recirculation button again to Heating tion.turn air recirculation off. The indicator light on This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-the button will turn off. Outside air is drawn sired position.into the passenger compartment and distributed outlets. Some air also flows from the defrostthrough the selected outlet. outlets. Defrosting or defoggingUse the off position for normal heater or air con- 1. Push the button to the OFF position This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets toditioner operation. for normal heating. The indicator light on defrost/defog the windows. Air conditioner button (if so the button will go off. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the equipped) 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position. position.The button is provided only on vehicles equipped 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-with an air conditioner. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- tion. tion.Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-desired (1 - 4) position and push the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- sired position between the middle and thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator sired position between the middle and the hot position.light comes on when the air conditioner is oper- hot position. ● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-ating. To turn off the air conditioner, pushthe button again. Ventilation dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOTThe air conditioner cooling function oper- This mode directs outside air to the side and position.ates only when the engine is running. center vent. 1. Push the button to the OFF position. The indicator light on the button will go off. 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • ● When the position is selected, the air 1. Push the button to the off position. ● When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if the 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the the indicator light on the button will outside temperature is more than 36°F position. not come on) if the outside temperature is (2°C). If the air flow control dial is in 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow control the position for more than one minute, tion. dial is in the position for more than the air conditioning system will continue to one minute, the air conditioning system will operate until the fan control dial is turned to 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- continue to operate until the fan control dial OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air sired position. is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, flow control dial is turned to a position other even if the air flow control dial is turned to a than the position. This dehumidifies Heating and defogging position other than the position. This the air which helps defog the windshield. This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- dehumidifies the air which helps defog the The mode automatically turns off, al- shield. windshield. The mode automatically lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas- turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn senger compartment to further improve the 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the into the passenger compartment to further defogging performance. position. improve the defogging performance.Bi-level heating 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- Operating tips tion.This mode directs cooler air from the side and Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladescenter vents and warmer air from the floor outlets. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- and air inlet in front of the windshield. ThisWhen the temperature control dial is moved to sired position between the middle and the improves heater operation.the full hot or full cool position, the air between hot position.the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-perature. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
    • AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if ● For quick cooling when the outside tem- 3. Push the button. The indicator lightso equipped) perature is high, push the button to comes on. the on position (indicator light on). Be sureStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to the When the air flow control dial is in the to return the button to the off positiondesired position, and push in the button to or position, the air conditioner automati- for normal cooling.activate the air conditioner. When the air condi- cally turns on (however, the indicator light will nottioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions Dehumidified heating illuminate) if the outside temperature is more thanare added to the heater operation. 36°F (2°C). If one of these positions is selected This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. for more than one minute, the air conditioningThe air conditioner cooling function oper- system will continue to operate until the fan con-ates only when the engine is running. 1. Push the button to the off position. trol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the even if the air flow control dial is turned to aCooling position other than these positions. This dehu- position.This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. midifies the air which helps defog the windshield. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- The mode automatically turns off, allowing 1. Push the button to the off position. tion. outside air to be drawn into the passenger com- partment to further improve the defogging perfor- 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 4. Push the button. The indicator light mance. position. comes on. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- sired position. tion. sired position. Operating tips 4. Push the button. The indicator light Dehumidified defogging comes on. ● Keep the windows and moonroof (if so This mode is used to defog the windows and equipped) closed while the air conditioner is 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- dehumidify the air. in operation. sired position. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the ● After parking in the sun, drive for two or three position. minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- close the windows. This allows the air con- tion. ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • ● The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps pre- vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- function. ● If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting. WHA1385 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
    • WHA1386 WHA13874-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • WHA1388 WHA1389 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
    • HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (Type B) WARNING● The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. WHA1406 Type B● Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior 1. Fan speed control dial CONTROLS air to become stale and the windows to 2. Front window defroster button fog up. 3. Rear window defroster switch (if so Fan control dial equipped) The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and 4. Air recirculation button controls fan speed. 5. Temperature control dial 6. Max A/C button Air flow control buttons 7. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select 8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button the air flow outlets. MAX — Air flows from center and side A/C vents with maximum cooling (air conditioning).4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • — Air flows from center and side OFF position (Indicator light off): HEATER OPERATION vents. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart- Heating — Air flows from center and side ment and distributed through the selected outlet. This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot vents and foot outlets. Use the off position for normal heater or air con- outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost — Air flows mainly from foot ditioner operation. outlets. outlets. Air conditioner button — Air flows from defroster out- 1. Press the button to the OFF position lets and foot outlets. for normal heating. The indicator light on Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the the button will go off. — Air flows mainly from defroster desired position and push the button to outlets. turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light 2. Press the air flow control button.Temperature control dial comes on when the air conditioner is operating. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. To turn off the air conditioner, push theThe temperature control dial allows you to adjust 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- button again.the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the sired position between the middle and thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase The air conditioner cooling function oper- hot position.the temperature, turn the dial to the right. ates only when the engine is running. Ventilation Air recirculation button Rear window defroster switch (if so This mode directs outside air to the side and equipped) center ventilators.ON position (Indicator light on): For more information about the rear window de-Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. froster switch, see “Rear window and outside 1. Press the button to the OFF position. mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and The indicator light on the button willPress the button to the on position when: controls” section of this manual. go off. ● driving on a dusty road. 2. Press the air flow control button. ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- senger compartment. tion. ● for maximum cooling when using the air con- 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- ditioner. sired position. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
    • Defrosting or defogging Bi-level heating ● When the position is selected, the airThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to conditioner automatically turns on (however, The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sidedefrost/defog the windows. and center vents and to the front and rear floor the indicator light on the button will outlets. not come on) if the outside temperature is 1. Press the defrost/defog button . more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. control button is selected for more than one 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- The indicator light on the button will minute, the air conditioning system will con- sired position between the middle and the go off. tinue to operate until the fan control dial is hot position. turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the ● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- 2. Press the air flow control button. A/C button is used to turn off the compres- dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- sor even if the air flow control dial is turned to setting and the temperature control to the tion. a position other than the position. full HOT position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- ● When the position is selected, the air sired position. the windshield. The mode automati- conditioner automatically turns on (however, cally turns off, allowing outside air to be the indicator light on the button will not Heating and defogging drawn into the passenger compartment to come on) if the outside temperature is more further improve the defogging performance. than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- than one minute, the air conditioning system shield. Operating tips will continue to operate until the fan control 1. Press the air flow control button. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or and air inlet in front of the windshield. This the A/C button is used to turn off the com- 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- improves heater operation. pressor even if the air flow control dial is tion. turned to a position other than the po- AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- sition. This dehumidifies the air which helps Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the sired position between the middle and the defog the windshield. The mode auto- hot position. desired position, and push in the button to matically turns off, allowing outside air to be activate the air conditioner. When the air condi- drawn into the passenger compartment to tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions further improve the defogging performance. are added to the heater operation.4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • The air conditioner cooling function oper- Dehumidified heating When the or positions are se-ates only when the engine is running. lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.Cooling (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if 1. Press the button to the OFF position. the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. The indicator light on the button will The air conditioning system will continue to op- 1. Press the button to the OFF position. go off. erate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF, the air conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is 2. Press the air flow control button. 2. Press the air flow control button. shut off, even if a position other than the air 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- flow control button is selected. This dehumidifies tion. tion. the air which helps defog the windshield. 4. Press the button on. The indicator The mode automatically turns off, allowing 4. Press the button. The indicator light outside air to be drawn into the passenger com- on the button will come on. light on the button will come on. partment to further improve the defogging perfor- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- mance. sired position. sired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- ● For quick cooling when the outside tem- Dehumidified defogging sired position. perature is high, push the button to This mode is used to defog the windows and the ON position. The indicator light on Operating tips dehumidify the air. the button will come on. Be sure to ● Keep the windows closed while the air con- return the to the OFF position for nor- 1. Press the air flow control button. ditioner is in operation. mal cooling. The indicator light on the 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 button will go off. You may also select MAX tion. minutes with the windows open to vent hot A/C for quick cooling. air from the passenger compartment. Then, 3. Press the button. The indicator light comes on. close the windows. This allows the air con- ditioner to cool the interior more quickly. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
    • ● The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps pre- vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. ● If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting. WHA09164-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • WHA0917 WHA0918 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
    • WHA0919 WHA13624-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEMThe air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- RADIO (if so equipped) Reception conditions will constantly change be-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,the environment in mind. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi- signal distance and interference from other ve- tion and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) hicles can work against ideal reception. De-This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radioozone layer. scribed below are some of the factors that can with the engine not running, the ignition switch affect your radio reception.Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- should be turned to the ACC position.quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- Some cellular phones or other devices may Radio reception is affected by station signal cause interference or a buzzing noise to cometioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditioner strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nate the noise.consumer information” section of this manual. normally are caused by these external influences. FM RADIO RECEPTIONA NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-mentally friendly” air conditioning system. hicle may influence radio reception quality. Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM WARNING Radio reception having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter- Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMThe air conditioner system contains re- station reception even if the FM station is withinfrigerant under high pressure. To avoid state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal ispersonal injury, any air conditioner ser- dio reception. These circuits are designed to directly related to the distance between thevice should be done only by an experi- extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-enced technician with proper equipment. ity of that reception. of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char- However, there are some general characteristics acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect off objects. radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from when the finest equipment is used. These char- a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade acteristics are completely normal in a given re- and/or drift. ception area and do not indicate any malfunction Static and flutter: During signal interference from in your NISSAN radio system. buildings, large hills or due to antenna position Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
    • (usually in conjunction with increased distance SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if sofrom the station transmitter), static or flutter can equipped)be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response. When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satelliteMultipath reception: Because of the reflective radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellitesignals reach the receiver at the same time. The radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orsignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- large building for satellite radio to receive all ofmentary flutter or loss of sound. the necessary data.AM RADIO RECEPTION No satellite radio reception is available and “NOAM signals, because of their low frequency, can SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isbend around objects and skip along the ground. selected unless optional satellite receiver andIn addition, the signals can be bounced off the antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radioionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of service subscription is active. Satellite radio canthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub- only be installed in vehicles that were factoryject to interference as they travel from transmitter pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is notto receiver. available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing Satellite radio performance may be affected ifthrough freeway underpasses or in areas with cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiomany tall buildings. It can also occur for several signal.seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteareas where no obstacles exist. antenna. LHA0099Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONSpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception.4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not expose the CD to direct sun- CHECK DISC: light. ● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- CAUTION ● CDs that are in poor condition or are rectly (the label side is facing up,● Do not force a compact disc into the CD dirty, scratched or covered with finger- etc.). insert slot. This could damage the CD prints may not work properly. ● Confirm that the CD is not bent or and/or CD changer/player. ● The following CDs may not work prop- warped and it is free of scratches.● Trying to load a CD with the CD door erly: closed could damage the CD and/or CD PRESS EJECT: ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) changer. This is an error due to excessive tem- ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) perature inside the player. Remove the● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD ● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) ● Do not use the following CDs as they can be played when the temperature of round discs that have the “COMPACT may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion: the player returns to normal. disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter UNPLAYABLE: ● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs that are not round The file is unplayable in this audio sys- player may malfunction due to the hu- tem (only MP3 or WMA CD). ● CDs with a paper label midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or completely. have abnormal edges ● The player may skip while driving on ● This audio system can only play pre- rough roads. recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs. ● The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the ture is extremely high or low. following messages will be displayed. Decrease/increase the temperature before use. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
    • Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (if ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyso equipped) is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/DTerms: conversion) per second. ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the methods for writing data to media. Writing most well-known compressed digital audio data once to the media is called a single file format. This format allows for near “CD session, and writing more than once is called quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of a multisession. normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with contains information about the digital music virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 file such as song title, artist, encoding bit compression removes the redundant and rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor- irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the mation is displayed on the Artist/song title human ear doesn’t hear. line on the display. ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a * Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis- compressed audio format created by Mi- tered trademarks and trademarks in the United crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA States of America and other countries of Mi- codec offers greater file compression than crosoft Corporation of the USA. the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of WHA1078 space when compared to MP3s at the same Playback order chart level of quality. ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • Playback order:Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated. ● The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display. ● If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root Folder” is displayed. ● The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
    • Specification chart: Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR versions*1 WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Text character number limitation 128 characters 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: Displayable character codes*2 UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • Troubleshooting guide:Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Poor sound quality Bit rate may be too low.It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.before the music startsplaying. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match theMusic cuts off or skips specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.filesMoves immediately to the When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therenext song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.the desired order Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
    • 11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 12. SEEK buttons WHA1075 Type A1. PRESET A·B·C button 6. FM·AM button2. CD eject button 7. TUNE buttons3. MENU button 8. RPT button4. CD insert slot 9. PWR button/VOL control knob5. CD button 10. RDM button4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • 11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 12. SEEK button FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A and B) (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera- tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section. Audio main operation Power button and VOL control knob Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, then press the PWR (power) button. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes play- ing. When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on. Pressing the PWR button again turns the system off. WHA1167 Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase Type B volume or to the left to decrease volume.1. PRESET A·B·C button 6. MENU button2. CD eject button 7. TUNE button3. FM·AM button 8. RPT button4. CD insert slot 9. PWR button/VOL control knob5. CD button 10. RDM button Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
    • MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL- Clock operation The display will return to the regular clock displayANCE and CLOCK): after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis- again to return to the regular clock display.Press the MENU button to change the mode as played; use the SEEK button to turn the clockfollows: display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF). Resetting the timeBAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio Clock set Hold the MENU button down and then press the→ BAS TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol- If the clock is not displayed with the ignition lows:To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press switch in the ACC or ON position, you need tothe MENU button until the desired mode appears select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but- ● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayedBass and Treble to the desired level. You can also SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode. before the reset will stay the same and theuse the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance minutes will be reset to :00.modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly untilfront and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK ● If the displayed minutes before the reset aresound between the right and left speakers. button until CLK ON appears. in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed before the reset will advance by one hourOnce you have adjusted the sound quality to the 2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will and the minutes will be reset to :00.desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly start flashing.until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- For example, if the MENU button and thewise, the radio or CD display will automatically 3. Press the SEEK button or to TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the timereappear after about 10 seconds. adjust the hour. displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display 4. Press the MENU button again; the display will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressedNOTE: while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the will switch to the minute adjustment mode.If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time thebutton will change the mode as follows: 5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK display will return to the audio.BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → button or to adjust the minutes. FM/AM radio operationHour adjustment → Minute adjustment →Audio → BAS 6. Press the MENU button again to exit the FM·AM button: clock set mode.For more information on setting the clock, see Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→“Clock set” later in this section. FM reception.4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during Station memory operations: If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast turns off and the compact disc begins to play. 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tosignal is weak, the radio automatically changes the A, B and C preset button in any combination CD button:from stereo to monaural reception. of AM or FM stations. When the CD button is pressed with a compact TUNE buttons: 1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns between storage banks. The radio displays off and the last used compact disc starts to play.Manual tuning the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of presets are active. TUNE (rewind and fastPress the TUNE or button for less 2. Tune to the desired station using manual forward) buttons:than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning. TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofTo move quickly through the channels, press and the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) When the TUNE or button is until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes pressed while the compact disc is playing, thehold either TUNE or button down when the select button is pressed.) compact disc plays at an increased speed whilefor more than 1.5 seconds. rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is 3. The channel indicator will then come on and SEEK buttons: the sound will resume. Programming is now released, the compact disc returns to normal play complete. speed.SEEK tuning 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- SEEK buttons: ner.Press the SEEK or button to seekthrough the frequencies. Seek tuning begins If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse When is pressed while the compact discfrom low to high frequencies, or high to low opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that is playing, the next track following the presentfrequencies, depending on which button is case, reset the desired stations. one starts to play from the beginning.pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta- Press several times to skip several tracks. Compact disc (CD) player operation Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-tion. Once the highest broadcasting station isreached, the radio continues in the seek mode at Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-the lowest broadcasting station. position and carefully insert the compact disc pears in the display window. (When the last track into the slot with the label side up. The compact on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts played.) to play. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
    • When is pressed, the track being played RDM button:returns to the beginning. Press several When the RDM button is pressed while the com-times to skip back several tracks. Each time the pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bebutton is pressed, the CD moves back one track. changed as follows:SEEK (Scan CDs) button: RDM ←→ NormalPress and hold the SEEK button for more RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10 ing will be played randomly.seconds of a track on the compact disc. TheSCAN icon is flashed during scan mode. CD EJECT button:The scan mode is canceled once it scans through When the button is pressed with a com-all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beor button is pressed during the scan ejected.mode. When the button is pressed while theRPT button: compact disc is being played, the compact discWhen the RPT button is pressed while the com- will eject and the system will turn off.pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be CD IN indicator:changed as follows: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the1 ←→ Normal CD is loaded with the system on.1: The track that is currently playing will be re-peated.4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • 12. CD eject button 13. VOL control knob and PWR button 14. Station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons 15. TUNE/TRACK knob and AUDIO button *No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio can only be installed in vehicles that were factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. WHA11721. PRESET A·B·C button 7. AUX button2. Display screen 8. SCAN RPT button3. DISP/CLOCK button 9. CAT FOLDER button4. SEEK/TRACK button 10. LOAD button5. CD button 11. CD insert slot6. RADIO button* Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
    • FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- Clock setCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume 1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until it changes as the driving speed changes.so equipped) beeps (>1.5 seconds). AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE, 2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CATFor all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera- FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section. FOLDER or button or SEEK Press the AUDIO control knob to change the TRACK or button to adjust theNo satellite radio reception is available when the mode as follows:RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio hours.stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE 3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again totenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio → SSV (if so equipped) switch to the minute adjustment.service subscription is active. Satellite radio can To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andonly be installed in vehicles that were factory 4. Press the CAT FOLDER or Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredpre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning button or SEEK TRACK oravailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired button to adjust the minutes.Audio main operation level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust 5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit Fade and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the the clock set mode.POWER/VOLUME control: sound level between the front and rear speakers The display will return to the regular clock displayTurn the ignition switch to ACC or ON, and then and Balance adjusts the sound between the right after 7 seconds, or you may press thepress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys- and left speakers. DISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or lar clock display.was playing immediately before the system was HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left. DISP (display) button:turned off. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the This DISP (display) button will show text aboutTo turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con- desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.trol knob. until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyvolume. reappear after about 10 seconds.4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • CD display mode MP3 display mode Display satellite radio display mode (if so equipped)To change the text displayed while playing a CD To change the text displayed when listening to anwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP button MP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CD To change the text displayed when listening towill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: with text is being used), press the DISP button. satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPDisc title ←→ Track number ←→ Track title. The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as button. The DISP button will scroll through the follows: File name ←→ Folder title ←→ Art- broadcast information as follows: Name ←→To change the default display mode, press the ist ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number. Title ←→ Current display mode.AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob to To change the default display mode, press the To change the default display mode press theselect the following display modes: Disc number AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE AUDIO button to display mode and press the←→ Folder number. appears on the display, then rotate the knob to TUNE button to select the following display select the following display modes: File name modes: Channel number ←→ Channel nameOnce the display mode is selected, press the ←→ Folder title ←→ Artist ←→ Disc number ←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isAUDIO knob again to store the setting. If the ←→ Folder number. selected press the AUDIO button again to storeAUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, the the setting. If the AUDIO button is not presseddisplay will refresh with the last selected display Once a display mode is selected, press the AU- after 8 seconds the display will refresh with themode setting. DIO knob again to store the setting. last selected display mode setting. ● Track title mode displays the title of the se- ● Folder number mode displays the selected ● Channel number mode displays the channel lected CD track. folder number and the track number that is number of the selected satellite radio sta- currently being played. ● Disc title mode displays the title of the CD tion. being played. ● Disc number mode displays the selected ● Channel name mode displays the channel disc number and the track number that is ● Track number mode displays the number name of the selected satellite radio station. currently being played. selected disc and the track that is currently ● Name mode displays the name of the artist, being played on the disk. ● Artist mode displays the artist title of the host or weather condition of the selected MP3/WMA file. satellite radio station. ● File name mode displays the track title of the ● Title mode displays the song title, show MP3/WMA file. name, or temperature of the selected satel- ● Folder title mode displays the folder name lite radio station. given to the MP3 folder. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
    • FM/AM/SAT radio operation signal is weak, the radio will automatically change period will stop scan tuning and the radio will from stereo to monaural reception. remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTFM/AM/SAT band select: button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan CAT FOLDER (tuning)Pushing the RADIO button will change the band tuning moves to the next station. button:as follows: PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-AM ←→ FM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped) To manually tune the radio, press the CAT tions): FOLDER button or or turn the tun- 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SATWhen the RADIO button is pushed while the ing knob to right or left.ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the (satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cradio will come on at the station last played. To move quickly through the channels, press and preset button in any combination of FM, AM or hold either the or button down for SAT stations.The last station played will also come on when more than 1.5 seconds. 1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thethe PWR/VOL control knob is depressed to ON. SEEK/TRACK tuning PRESET A·B·C select button.No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio button: 2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationstations unless optional satellite receiver and an- band.tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio Press the SEEK/TRACK button or 3. Tune to the desired station using manual,service subscription is active. Satellite radio can for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyonly be installed in vehicles that were factory of the desired station memory buttons (1 –pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not broadcasting station. 6) until a beep sound is heard.available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite To seek quickly through the channels, press andradio is not operational then the RADIO button is hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 4. The channel indicator will then come on andused to toggle between AM and FM bands. seconds. When the button is released the radio the sound will resume. Programming is now will seek to the next broadcasting station. complete.If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pushed, the compact disc will automati- SCAN RPT tuning: 5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-cally be turned off and the last radio station ner. Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5played will come on. seconds to stop at each broadcasting station If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseThe FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM (AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds. opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatstereo reception. When the stereo broadcast Pressing the button again during this 5 second case, reset the desired stations.4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • Radio data system (RDS): If the system has been turned off while the com- SEEK/TRACK button: pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOLRDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data control knob will start the compact disc.information service transmitted by some radio When the button is pressed for less thanstations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, therently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but in the CD changer. track being played returns to its beginning. Pressmany stations are now considering broadcasting several times to skip back through tracks. The LOAD button:RDS data. compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed.RDS can display: To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load ● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select When the button is pressed for less than the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, ● Station name, such as “The Groove”. button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. the next track will start to play from its beginning. ● Music or programming type such as “Clas- Press several times to skip through tracks. The To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the compact disc will advance the number of times sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”. load button for more than 1.5 seconds. the button is pressed. (When the last track on the ● Artist and song information. The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the compact disc is skipped through, the first trackIf the station broadcasts RDS information, the display when CDs are loaded into the changer. will be played.)RDS icon is displayed. CD button: CAT FOLDER button:Compact disc (CD) changer operation When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will While playing a CD, press and hold the CATTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with the turn on and the compact disc will start to play. FOLDER button or to fast forwardlabel side facing up. The compact disc will be or rewind a track on a CD. When the CD button is pressed with the com-guided automatically into the slot and start play- pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio MP3 CAT FOLDER button:ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOAD will automatically be turned off and the compactbutton. disc will start to play. While playing an MP3 CD, press the CATIf the radio is already operating, it will automati- FOLDER button or to scan back-cally turn off and the compact disc will play. ward or forward through available folders. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
    • Press and hold the CAT FOLDER button CD EJECT:or to fast forward or rewind a track on anMP3 CD. Current/Selected disc:CD select buttons: ● Press the button, then press the slotTo play another CD that has been loaded, press a number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. TheCD select button (1 – 6). compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num- ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadedSCAN/RPT: disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is notWhen the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed removed within 15 seconds, the disc willwhile the compact disc is played, the play pattern reload.can be changed as follows: All discs:ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT ● Press and hold the button for more→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be WHA1168RPT ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed AUX jack (if so equipped)ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. within 20 seconds or the button is pressed again during the eject sequence, The AUX jack ᭺ is located above the power 11 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will the entire disc eject sequence will be can- outlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts anybe repeated. celed. standard analog audio input such as from a por-1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing table cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptopwill be repeated When this button is pressed while a compact computer.ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be disc is playing, the compact disc will eject andplayed randomly the last source will be played. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- when it is plugged into the AUX jack.rently playing will be played randomly CD IN indicator: The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only.4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. LHA0049 LHA1087CD CARE AND CLEANING 1. Volume control switch 2. Phone operation switch● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the 3. POWER on and MODE select switch disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. 4. Tuning switch● Always place the discs in the storage case STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR when they are not being used. AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft The audio system can be operated using the cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular controls on the steering wheel. motion. POWER on/off switch● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON alcohol intended for industrial use. position, push the MODE switch to turn the audio system on. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
    • CAR PHONE OR CB RADIOMODE select switch Next/Previous track (CD): When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingPush the mode select switch to change the Push the tuning switch or for less precautions; otherwise, the new equipment maymodes: than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the adversely affect the engine control system and present track or skip to the next track. Push other electronic parts.PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → CD* several times to skip back or skip through tracks.→ AUX** → PRESET A Change disc (CD) (if so equipped): WARNING*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded. ● A cellular telephone should not be used**This mode is only available when a compatible Push the SEEK tuning switch or for while driving so full attention may be more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing given to vehicle operation. Some juris-auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack. disc up or down. dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-Volume control switch ANTENNA phones while driving.Push the volume control switch up or down to The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be ● If you must make a call while your ve-increase or decrease the volume. removed. When you need to remove the antenna, hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. lar phone operational mode (if so Tuning equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock- ercise extreme caution at all times soMemory change (radio): wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification full attention may be given to vehicle using a suitable tool such as an open-end operation.Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less wrench. The antenna rod tightening specificationthan 1.5 seconds to change to the next or previ- ● If you are unable to devote full attention is 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 – 32 in-lb). Do not use pliersous preset. to vehicle operation while talking on to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the phone, pull off the road to a safeSeek tuning (radio): the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be location and stop your vehicle. hand tightened to the proper specification.Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- CAUTIONous radio station. Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation.4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (if so equipped) CAUTION WARNING● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle sible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in be given to vehicle operation. (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the ● If you are unable to devote full attention antenna wire next to any harness. to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio location and stop your vehicle. as recommended by the manufacturer.● Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION radio chassis to the body. To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. use a phone after starting the engine.● Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage con- trol system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to “Vari- able voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- tion later in this manual.● Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
    • when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can connect up to 5 different Bluetoothா cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. ● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. ● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- mended phone list and pairing. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: WHA1360 – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with vice area.Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle.patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you – Your vehicle is in an area where it is Once your cellular phone is connected to the difficult to receive a cellular signal; suchcan set up the wireless connection between your in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- as in a tunnel, in an underground parkingcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. ing procedure is required. Your phone is automati- garage, near a tall building or in a moun-With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can cally connected with the in-vehicle phone module tainous area.4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual from being dialed. regarding the telephone charges, cellular BLUETOOTH௡ is a phone antenna and body, etc. trademark owned by● When the radio wave condition is not ideal Bluetooth SIG, Inc., or ambient sound is too loud, it may be REGULATORY INFORMATION difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur- U.S.A. and licensed to ing a call. FCC Regulatory information Visteon.● Do not place the cellular phone in an area – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the USING THE SYSTEM surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows quality degradation and wireless connection modification, or attachments could damage hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone disruption. the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- System. tions.● While a cellular phone is connected through If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat- – Operation is subject to the following two con- not be available so full attention may be given to ditions: vehicle operation. tery power of the cellular phone may dis- charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா 1. This device may not cause interference and Initialization Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge 2. this device must accept any interference, When the ignition switch is placed in the ON cellular phones. including interference that may cause un- position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,● If the hands-free phone system seems to be desired operation of the device. which takes a few seconds. If the button is malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” IC Regulatory information pressed before the initialization completes, the later in this section. You can also visit system will announce “Hands-free phone system www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- – Operation is subject to the following two con- not ready” and will not react to voice commands. shooting help. ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any● Some cellular phones or other devices may interference, including interference that may cause interference or a buzzing noise to cause undesired operation of the device. come from the audio system speakers. Stor- – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re- ing the device in a different location may quirements of the Canadian Interference- reduce or eliminate the noise. Causing Equipment Regulations. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
    • Operating tips ● If a command is not recognized, the system ● To use the system faster, you may speak the announces, “Command not recognized. second level commands with the main menuTo get the best performance out of the NISSAN Please try again.” Repeat the command in a command on the main menu. For example,Voice Recognition system, observe the following: clear voice. press the button and after the tone ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as ● If you want to go back to the previous com- say, “Call Redial.” possible. Close the windows to eliminate mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc- surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration NOTE: tion” any time the system is waiting for a sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system response. The combined command of Call and (a from recognizing voice commands correctly. Name) cannot be used. ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a ● You can cancel a command when the sys- command. Otherwise, the command will not tem is waiting for a response by saying, How to say numbers be received properly. “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer also press and hold the button on the to the following rules and examples. after the tone sounds. steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses- ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. between words. sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to Example: 1-800-662-6200 indicate you have exited the system.Giving voice commands – “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice oh”, orTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press feedback, press the volume control switchesand release the button located on the (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being – “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohsteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a provided with feedback. You can also use oh”command. the radio volume control knob. ● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsThe command given is picked up by the micro- places only. ● In most cases you can interrupt the voicephone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted. feedback to speak the next command by Example: 1-800-662-6200 pressing the button on the steering ● If you need to hear the available commands wheel. – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh for the current menu again, say “Help” and oh”, the system will repeat them.4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty ● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#” two hundred,” and at any time in any position of the phone number (available only when using “Special – NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two Dialing” command). hundred” See “List of voice commands” and “Special● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. Dialing” in this section for more information. The system will prompt you to continue en- tering digits, if desired. Example: 1-555-1212 *123 Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One five five five one two one two star one two three” – “One eight zero zero” NOTE: The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. For best results, say phone numbers as single digits. LHA1086 – “six six two” The voice command “Help” is available at any CONTROL BUTTONS The system repeats the numbers and time. Please use the “Help” command to get prompts you to enter more. information on how to use the system. The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands- Free Phone System are located on the steering – “six two zero zero” wheel.● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail- PHONE/SEND able when using the “Special Dialing” com- mand and the “Send” command during a Press the button to initiate a VR call). session or answer an incoming call.● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using You can also use the button to the “Special Dialing” command). interrupt the system feedback and give● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available a command at once. See “List of voice only when storing a phone book number). commands” and “During a call” in this section for more information. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41
    • 2. The system announces: “Press the Pairing procedure PHONE/END PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the While the voice recognition system is hands-free phone system to enter the NOTE: speaker adaptation mode or press the The pairing procedure must be performed active, press and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recogni- PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle ferent language.” starts moving during the procedure, the tion system at any time. procedure will be cancelled. 3. Press the button. TUNING SWITCH Main Menu For information on speaker adaptation, see While using the voice recognition “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this sec- “Connect phone” ᭺ A system, tilt the tuning switch up or tion. “Add phone” ᭺ B down to manually control the phone 4. The system announces the current language Initiate from handset ᭺ C system. and gives you the option to change the lan- Name phone ᭺ DGETTING STARTED guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). To select the current language, 1. Press the button on the steeringThe following procedures will help you get wheel. The system announces the availablestarted using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To select a different language, tilt the tuning commands.System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voice switch ( or ) up or down. 2. Say: “Connect phone” ᭺. The system ac- Acommands” in this section. knowledges the command and announces NOTE: the next set of available commands.Choosing a language 3. Say: “Add phone” ᭺. The system acknowl- B You must press the button within 5You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free edges the command and asks you to initiate seconds to change the language.Phone System using English, Spanish or French. pairing from the phone handset ᭺. C 5. If you decide not to change the language, doTo change the language, perform the following. not press either button. After 5 seconds, the 1. Press and hold the button for more VR session will end, and the language will than 5 seconds. not be changed.4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • The pairing procedure of the cellular phone Making a call by entering a phone four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than varies according to each cellular phone number 10 digits or any special characters, say model. See the cellular phone Owner’s “Special Dialing”. See “How to say num- Manual for details. You can also visit Main Menu bers” in this section for more information. www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc- “Call” ᭺ A 5. When you have finished speaking the phone tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- “Phone Number” ᭺ B number, the system repeats it back and an- lular phones. nounces the available commands. When prompted for a Passkey code, enter Speak the digits ᭺ C 6. Say: “Dial” ᭺. The system acknowledges D “1234” from the handset. The Passkey code “Dial” ᭺ D the command and makes the call. “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed. 1. Press the button on the steering For additional command options, see “List of wheel. A tone will sound. voice commands” in this section.4. The system asks you to say a name for the phone ᭺. D 2. Say: “Call” ᭺. The system acknowledges A Receiving a call the command and announces the next set of If the name is too long or too short, the available commands. When you hear the ring tone, press the system tells you, then prompts you for a button on the steering wheel. name again. Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters. Once the call has ended, press the button Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name 3. Say “Phone Number” ᭺. The system ac- B on the steering wheel. already used, the system tells you, then knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. NOTE: prompts you for a name again. 4. Say the number you wish to call starting with If you do not wish to take the call when you the area code in single digit format ᭺. If the C hear the ring tone, press the button system has trouble recognizing the correct on the steering wheel. phone number, try entering the number in For additional command options, see “List of the following groups: 3-digit area code, voice commands” later in this section. 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex- ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43
    • LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS “Call” (Speak Digits) ᭺ B Main Menu Main Menu When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” “Call” “Call” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” “Phonebook” (Speak name) ᭺ A in this section for more details. “Recent Calls” “Phone Number” “Special Number” ᭺ C “Connect Phone” (Speak Digits) ᭺ B For dialing more than 10 digits or any special “Special Number” ᭺ C characters, say “Special Number”. When theWhen you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from the “Redial” ᭺ D system acknowledges the command, the systemcommands on the Main Menu. The following “Call Back” ᭺ E will prompt you to speak the number.pages describe these commands and the com- “Redial” ᭺ Dmands in each sub-menu. (Speak Name) ᭺ A Use the Redial command to call the last numberRemember to wait for the tone before If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you that was dialed.speaking. can dial a number associated with a name and location. The system acknowledges the command, re-After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear peats the number and begins dialing.the list of commands currently available any time See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how tothe system is waiting for a response. store entries. If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial” andIf you want to end an action without completing it, When prompted by the system, say the name of ends the VR session.you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the the phone book entry you wish to call. The systemsystem is waiting for a response. The system will acknowledges the name. “Call back” ᭺ Eend the VR session. Whenever the VR session is If there are multiple locations associated with the Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofcancelled, a double beep is played to indicate name, the system asks you to choose the loca- the last incoming call within the vehicle.you have exited the system. tion. The system acknowledges the command, re-If you want to go back to the previous command, Once you have confirmed the name and location, peats the number and begins dialing.you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system begins the call.the system is waiting for a response.4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • If a call back number does not exist, the system ● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com- “Phonebook” (phones withoutannounces, “There is no number to call back” and mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா automatic phonebook downloadends the VR session. Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired. function)During a call The system announces, “Transfer call. Call NOTE:During a call there are several command options transferred to privacy mode.” The systemavailable. Press the button on the steering then ends the VR session. The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com- able when the vehicle is moving. To reconnect the call from the cellular phonemands. Main Menu to the Bluetooth Hands-Free System, press ● “Help” — The system announces the avail- the button. “Phonebook” able commands. “Transfer Entry” ᭺ A ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute ● “Go back/Correction” — The system an- your voice so the other party cannot hear it. “Delete Entry” ᭺ B nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session Use the mute command again to unmute “List Names” ᭺ C and returns to the call. your voice. For phones that do not support automatic down- ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces NOTE: load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா pro- “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu- to the call. If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook. ● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during to “off” for the next call so the other party phone paired with the system. a call. For example, if you were directed to can hear your voice. dial an extension by an automated system: NOTE: Say: “Send one two three four.” Each phone has its own separate phone- book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone- The system acknowledges the command book if you are currently connected with and sends the tones associated with the Phone B. numbers. The system then ends the VR ses- sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”, Say “pound” for “#”. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45
    • “Transfer entry” ᭺ A Manual for details. You can also visit “Phonebook” (phones with automatic www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions phonebook download function)Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new on transferring phone numbers from NISSANname in the system. recommended cellular phones. NOTE:When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry. The system repeats the number and prompts you The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail- for the next command. When you have finished able when the vehicle is moving. For example, say: “Mary.” entering numbers or transferring an entry, chooseIf the name is too long or too short, the system “Store.” Main Menutells you, then prompts you for a name again. “Phonebook” The system confirms the name, location and “List Names” ᭺ AAlso, if the name sounds too much like a name number.already stored, the system tells you, then prompts “Transfer Entry” ᭺Byou for a name again. “Delete Entry” ᭺ B “Delete Entry” ᭺C “Record Name” ᭺ DThe system will ask you to transfer a phone Use the Delete Entry command to erase onenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory. entry from the phonebook. After the system rec- For phones that support automatic download of the ognizes the command, speak the name to delete phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா profile), theEnter a phone number by voice command: or say “List Names” to choose an entry. “Phonebook” command is used to manage entriesFor example, say: “five five five one two one two.” to the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name ofSee “How to say numbers” in this section for “List names” ᭺ C an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.more information. Use the List Names command to hear all the The phonebook stores up to 1000 names forTo transfer a phone number stored in the cellular names in the phonebook. each phone paired with the system.phone’s memory: The system recites the phonebook entries but When a phone is connected to the system, theSay “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges does not include the actual phone numbers. phonebook is automatically downloaded to thethe command and asks you to initiate the transfer When the playback of the list is complete, the vehicle. This feature allows you to access yourfrom the phone handset. The new contact phone system goes back to the main menu. phonebook from the Bluetoothா system and callnumber will be transferred from the cellular You can stop the playback of the list at any time contacts by name. You can record a customphone via the Bluetoothா communication link. by pressing the button on the steering voice tag for contact names that the system hasThe transfer procedure varies according to each wheel. The system ends the VR session. difficulty recognizing. For more information seecellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s “Record Name” in this section.4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • NOTE: If the name is too long or too short, the system The system repeats the number and prompts you tells you, then prompts you for a name again. for the next command. When you have finishedEach phone has its own separate phone- entering numbers or transferring an entry, choosebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phone- Also, if the name sounds too much like a name “Store.”book if you are currently connected with already stored, the system tells you, then promptsPhone B. you for a name again. The system confirms the name, location and number.“List names” ᭺ A The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. “Delete Entry” ᭺ CUse the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book. Enter a phone number by voice command: Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-The system recites the phone book entries but For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” ognizes the command, speak the name to deletedoes not include the actual phone numbers. See “How to say numbers” in this section for or say “List Names” to choose an entry.When the playback of the list is complete, the more information.system goes back to the main menu. “Record name” ᭺ D To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularYou can stop the playback of the list at any time phone’s memory: The system allows you to record custom voiceby pressing the button on the steering tags for contact names in the phonebook that the Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgeswheel. The system ends the VR session. See the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can the command and asks you to initiate the transfer“Record Name” command in this section for in- also be used to record voice tags to directly dial from the phone handset. The new contact phoneformation about recording custom voice tags for an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice number will be transferred from the cellularlist entries that the system has difficulty pro- tags can be recorded to the system. phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.nouncing. The transfer procedure varies according to each “Recent Calls”“Transfer entry” ᭺ B cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Main MenuUse the Transfer Entry command to store a new Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions “Recent Calls”name in the system. on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN “Outgoing” ᭺ AWhen prompted by the system, say the name you recommended cellular phones. “Incoming” ᭺ Bwould like to give the new entry. “Missed” ᭺ C For example, say: “Mary.” Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47
    • Use the Recent Calls command to access out- Use the Connect Phone commands to manage SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODEgoing, incoming or missed calls. the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetoothா function on the vehicle. Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-“Outgoing” ᭺ A dialect users to train the system to improve rec- “Add Phone” ᭺ A ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofUse the Outgoing command to list the outgoing Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to commands, the users can create a voice model ofcalls made from the vehicle. the vehicle. See “Pairing procedure” in this sec- their own voice that is stored in the system. The“Incoming” ᭺ B tion for more information. system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for each connected phone.Use the Incoming command to list the incoming “Select Phone” ᭺ Bcalls made to the vehicle. Training procedure Use the Select Phone command to select from a“Missed” ᭺ C list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys- The procedure for training a voice is as follows. tem will list the names assigned to each phone 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietUse the Missed command to list the calls made to and then prompt you for the phone you wish to outdoor location.the vehicle that were not answered. select. Only one phone can be active at a time.“Connect Phone” 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run- “Delete Phone” ᭺ C ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-NOTE: Use the Delete Phone command to delete a sion in P (Park). phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-The Add Phone command is not available tem will list the names assigned to each phone 3. Press and hold the button for morewhen the vehicle is moving. and then prompt you for the phone you wish to than 5 seconds. delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also 4. The system announces: “Press the Main Menu delete that phonebook for that phone. PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the “Connect Phone” “Turn Bluetooth OFF” ᭺ D hands-free phone system to enter the “Add Phone” ᭺ A speaker adaptation mode or press the Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- “Select Phone” ᭺ B a wireless connection to your phone. ferent language.” “Delete Phone” ᭺ C “Turn Bluetooth OFF” ᭺ D4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • 5. Press the button. Training phrases ● call three one nine oh two For information on selecting a different lan- ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight During the SA mode, the system instructs the guage, see “Choosing a language” in this trainer to say the following phrases. (The system ● cancel section. will prompt you for each phrase.) ● call back number 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected ● phonebook transfer entry ● call star two zero nine five automatically. If both memory locations are ● delete phone already in use, the system will prompt you to ● dial three oh four two nine overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- ● delete call back number ● dial eight three zero five one vided by the system. ● record name ● incoming 7. When preparation is complete and you are ● four three pause two nine pause zero ● transfer entry ready to begin, press the button. ● delete redial number ● eight pause nine three two pause seven ● phonebook list names 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system. ● delete all entries ● call eight oh five four one 9. When training is finished, the system will tell ● call seven two four zero nine ● correction you an adequate number of phrases have ● phonebook delete entry ● connect phone been recorded. ● next entry ● dial seven four oh one eight10. The system will announce that speaker ad- ● previous entry aptation has been completed and the sys- ● dial star two one seven oh tem is ready. ● delete ● yes ● dial nine seven two six sixThe SA mode will stop if: ● no ● call seven six three oh one ● The button is pressed for more than 5 ● select ● go back seconds in SA mode. ● missed ● call five six two eight zero ● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode. ● dial eight five six nine two ● dial six six four three seven ● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ● Bluetooth on LOCK position. ● outgoing Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49
    • MANUAL CONTROL ● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning ( ) switch up or down. The system willWhile using the voice recognition system, it is always speak the current menu option. De-possible to select menu options by using the pending on the audio display, it will alsosteering wheel controls instead of speaking voice show the current menu option.commands. The manual control mode does notallow dialing a phone number by digits. The user ● To select the current menu option, press themay select an entry from the Phonebook or Re- PHONE/SEND ( ) button.cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,exit the manual control mode by pressing and ● To go back to the previous menu, press theholding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current menu is the Main Menu, pressing thetime, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) buttonwill start the Hands Free Phone System. PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the Phone system.Operating tips ● To exit the manual control mode, press and ● To enter manual control mode, start the hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5 voice recognition system and tilt the tuning seconds. ( ) switch up or down. The system will speak ЉShowing Manual OptionsЉ when manual controls are initially activated.4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
    • TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved. Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im- prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section. phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51
    • 5 Starting and drivingPrecautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 On-pavement and off-road driving Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-36Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Hill start assist system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
    • Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
    • PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ● The exhaust system and body should be entering the vehicle, drive with all win- inspected by a qualified mechanic● Do not leave children or adults who dows fully open, and have the vehicle whenever: would normally require the assistance inspected immediately. of others alone in your vehicle. Pets a. The vehicle is raised for service. should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage. entering into the passenger others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine compartment. the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time. temperatures in a closed vehicle could c. You notice a change in the sound of quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the lift gate and rear windows the exhaust system. severe or possibly fatal injuries to closed while driving, otherwise exhaust d. You have had an accident involving people or animals. gases could be drawn into the passen- damage to the exhaust system, un- ger compartment. If you must drive with● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or derbody, or rear of the vehicle. the lift gate or rear windows open, fol- straps to help prevent it from sliding or low these precautions: ● If a special body, camper, or other shifting. Do not place cargo higher than equipment is added for recreational or the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- 1. Open all the windows. other usage, follow the manufacturer’s lision, unsecured cargo could cause recommendation to prevent carbon 2. Set the air recirculation but- personal injury. monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan control dial to 4 (high) to circulate occupy these areas while the engine isEXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) the air. running even if the vehicle is parked. Some recreational vehicle appliances WARNING ● If electrical wiring or other cable con- such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, nections must pass to a trailer through etc. may also generate carbon● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they the seal on the lift gate or the body, contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. follow the manufacturer’s recommen- monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- ous. It can cause unconsciousness or try into the vehicle. death.5-2 Starting and driving
    • THREE-WAY CATALYST ● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- you should determine the proper tire inflation tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or pressure for those tires.)The three-way catalyst is an emission control electrical systems can cause overrich As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beendevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemgases in the three-way catalyst are burned at causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalehigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants. ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- when one or more of your tires is significantly able loss of performance or other un- WARNING under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire usual operating conditions are pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate tem are very hot. Keep people, animals all 4 tires to the proper pressure. Driving on a or flammable materials away from the ● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to exhaust system components. level. Running out of fuel could cause overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-● Do not stop or park the vehicle over the engine to misfire, damaging the inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread flammable materials such as dry grass, three-way catalyst. life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and waste paper or rags. They may ignite ● Do not race the engine while warming it stopping ability. and cause a fire. up. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for CAUTION ● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s the engine. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits even if under-inflation has not reached the level to from leaded gasoline will seriously re- TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to SYSTEM (TPMS) telltale. help reduce exhaust pollutants. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a should be checked monthly when cold and in- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the flated to the inflation pressure recommended by system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard function indicator is combined with the low tire or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has pressure telltale. When the system detects a tires of a different size than the size indicated on malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continuously the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, illuminated. This sequence will continue upon Starting and driving 5-3
    • subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- ● The low tire pressure warning light does not WARNINGfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is automatically turn off when the tire pressureilluminated, the system may not be able to detect of all 4 tires are adjusted. After the tires are ● If the low tire pressure warning lightor signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS inflated to the recommended pressure, the illuminates while driving, avoid suddenmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,including the installation of replacement or alter- MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadnate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent turn off the low tire pressure warning light. to a safe location and stop the vehiclethe TPMS from functioning properly. Always Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire as soon as possible. Driving with under- inflated tires may permanently damagecheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- pressure. the tires and increase the likelihood ofing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on tire failure. Serious vehicle damageensure that the replacement or alternate tires and could occur and may lead to an acci- the heat caused by the vehicle’s operationwheels allow the TPMS to continue to function dent and could result in serious per- and the outside temperature. Low outsideproperly. sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for temperature can lower the temperature ofAdditional information: the air inside the tire which can cause a all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the recommended COLD tire pressure ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- pressure of the spare tire. tion label to turn the low tire pressure nate. If the warning light illuminates in low warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle ambient temperature, check the tire pres- replace it with a spare tire as soon as is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 sure for all four tires. possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case km/h). Also, this system may not detect a of emergency” section for changing a ● The Tire and Loading Information label (also sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire.) referred to as the vehicle placard or tire flat tire while driving). inflation pressure label) is located in the driver’s door opening. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.5-4 Starting and driving
    • ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Some examples are: ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD is replaced, the TPMS will not function – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio DRIVING PRECAUTIONS and the low tire pressure warning light frequencies are near the vehicle. will flash for approximately 1 minute. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher The light will remain on after 1 minute. – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as being used in or near the vehicle. They have higher ground clearance than passen- possible for tire replacement and/or – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a ger cars to make them capable of performing in a system resetting. DC/AC converter is being used in or near the variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.● Replacing tires with those not originally vehicle. This gives them a higher center of gravity than specified by NISSAN could affect the ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground FCC Notice: clearance is a better view of the road, allowing proper operation of the TPMS. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- you to anticipate problems. However, they are not● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol proved by the party responsible for compli- designed for cornering at the same speeds as tire sealant into the tires, as this may ance could void the user’s authority to op- conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more cause a malfunction of the tire pressure erate the equipment. than low-slung sports cars are designed to per- sensors. form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at This device complies with Part 15 of the all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As CAUTION FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate Canada. this vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlDo not place metalized film or any metal Operation is subject to the following two or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This conditions: (1) This device may not cause person is significantly more likely to die than amay cause poor reception of the signals harmful interference, and (2) this device person wearing a seat belt.from the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly. must accept any interference received, in- Be sure to read the driving safety precautions cluding interference that may cause undes- later in this section.Some devices and transmitters may temporarily ired operation of the device.interfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate. Starting and driving 5-5
    • AVOIDING COLLISION AND OFF-ROAD RECOVERY ● If you decide that it is not safe to return theROLLOVER vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, While driving, the right side or left side wheels road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. WARNING occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe ing the procedure below. Please note that this RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSand prudent manner may result in loss of procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurcontrol or an accident. must be driven as appropriate based on the con- if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure lossall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. can also be caused by driving on under-inflatedhigh speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- tires. 2. Do not apply the brakes.neuvers, because these driving practices could Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel and stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayany vehicle, loss of control could result in a with both hands and try to hold a straight speeds.collision with other vehicles or objects or course.cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-the loss of control causes the vehicle to 4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel- ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when under 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve- tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airscription or over-the-counter drugs which may is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve- pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle control of the vehicle by following the procedureoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and speed is reduced. below. Please note that this procedure is only asupplemental restraint system” section of this general guide. The vehicle must be driven asmanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions steering wheel until both tires return to the hicle, road and traffic.and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted road surface. When all tires are on the roador improperly belted person is significantly surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-more likely to be injured or killed than a propriate driving lane.person properly wearing a seat belt.5-6 Starting and driving
    • WARNING DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DRIVING Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andThe following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle if off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. WARNING ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forLosing control of the vehicle may cause a Never drive under the influence of alcohol leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-collision and result in personal injury. or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- hicle.● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in duces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after Remember that two-wheel drive models are less the direction of the flat tire. capable than four-wheel drive models for rough drinking alcohol increases the likelihood● Do not rapidly apply the brakes. road driving and extrication when stuck in deep of being involved in an accident injuring● Do not rapidly release the accelerator yourself and others. Additionally, if you snow or mud, or the like. pedal. are injured in an accident, alcohol can Please observe the following precautions:● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. increase the severity of the injury.1. Remain calm and do not over react. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, WARNING2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel you must choose not to drive under the influence ● Drive carefully when off the road and with both hands and try to hold a straight of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are avoid dangerous areas. Every person course. injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- who drives or rides in this vehicle though the local laws vary on what is considered should be seated with their seat belt3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. fastened. This will keep you and your affects all people differently and most people passengers in position when driving4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location underestimate the effects of alcohol. over rough terrain. off the road and away from traffic if possible. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And ● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- stead drive either straight up or straight stop the vehicle. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- tip over sideways much more easily either contact a roadside emergency service hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. than they can forward or backward. to change the tire or see “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Starting and driving 5-7
    • ● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. ● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around ● Lower your speed when encountering If you drive up them, you may stall. If when driving over rough terrain. Prop- strong crosswinds. With a higher center you drive down them, you may not be erly secure all cargo so it will not be of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- able to control your speed. If you drive thrown forward and cause injury to you fected by strong side winds. Slower across them, you may roll over. or your passengers. speeds ensure better vehicle control.● Do not shift gears while driving on ● To avoid raising the center of gravity ● Do not drive beyond the performance downhill grades as this could cause excessively, do not exceed the rated capability of the tires, even with 4WD loss of control of the vehicle. capacity of the roof rack (if so engaged. equipped) and evenly distribute the● Stay alert when driving to the top of a ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo hill. At the top there could be a drop-off tempt to raise two wheels off the area as far forward and as low as pos- or other hazard that could cause an ground and shift the transmission to sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires accident. any drive or reverse position with the larger than specified in this manual. engine running. Doing so may result in● If your engine stalls or you cannot make This could cause your vehicle to roll drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- it to the top of a steep hill, never at- over. hicle movement which could result in tempt to turn around. Your vehicle ● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the serious vehicle damage or personal could tip or roll over. Always back steering wheel when driving off-road. injury. straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never The steering wheel could move sud- back down in N (Neutral) or with the denly and injure your hands. Instead clutch depressed (manual transmission drive with your fingers and thumbs on vehicles), using only the brake, as this the outside of the rim. could cause loss of control. ● Before operating the vehicle, ensure● Heavy braking going down a hill could that the driver and all passengers have cause your brakes to overheat and fade, their seat belts fastened. resulting in loss of control and an acci- dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low ● Always drive with the floor mats in gear to control your speed. Use the hill place as the floor may become hot. descent control feature (if so equipped).5-8 Starting and driving
    • IGNITION SWITCH● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped ● Always use tires of the same type, size, WARNING vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, (such as the dynamometers used by or radial), and tread pattern on all four ● Never remove the ignition key or place some states for emissions testing), or wheels. Install tire chains on the rear the ignition switch in the LOCK position similar equipment even if the other two wheels when driving on slippery roads while driving. The steering wheel will wheels are raised off the ground. Make and drive carefully. lock (for models with a steering lock sure you inform test facility personnel mechanism). This may cause the driver ● Be sure to check the brakes immedi- to lose control of the vehicle and could that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD ately after driving in mud or water. See result in serious vehicle damage or per- before it is placed on a dynamometer. “Brake system” later in this section for sonal injury. Using the wrong test equipment may “Wet brakes”. result in drivetrain damage or unex- pected vehicle movement which could ● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep result in serious vehicle damage or per- hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it sonal injury. rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may ● Whenever you drive off-road through cause loss of control. sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning may be required. See “Periodic mainte- maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. nance” in the “NISSAN Service and Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle Maintenance Guide.” has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not de- signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could re- sult in loss of control and/or a rollover accident. Starting and driving 5-9
    • To remove the key from the ignition switch: There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position 1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch. tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi- When the ignition is in the OFF position, tion. the steering wheel is not locked (for mod- 2. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- els with a steering lock mechanism). tion. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it 3. Remove the key from the ignition. must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position. If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park) To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to position after the ignition switch is placed in the the LOCK position. Remove the key. To OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot unlock the steering wheel, insert the key be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as and turn it gently while rotating the steer- follows to remove the key. ing wheel slightly right and left. WSD0041AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so 1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park) If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi- position. tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orequipped) 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON right while turning the key to unlock theThe ignition lock is designed so the ignition key cylinder. position.switch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key removed until the shift selector is 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.moved to the P (Park) position. 4. Remove the key.When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position. The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gearIf the shift selector is not returned to P (Park) positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition, the ignition switch cannot be moved to position or if the key is removed from the switch.the LOCK position. The shift selector can be moved if the igni- tion switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.5-10 Starting and driving
    • KEY POSITIONS 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. LOCK: Normal parking position (0) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK OFF: (Not used) (1) position, and wait approximately 10 sec- ACC: (Accessories) (2) onds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) ON: Normal operating position (3) separate from the registered key. This position turns on the ignition system and the If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- electrical accessories. ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- START: (4) rate key ring to avoid interference from other WSD0052 devices. This position starts the engine. As soon as theMANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so engine has started, release the key. It automati-equipped) cally returns to the ON position.The ignition switch includes a device that helps NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing. SYSTEM (if so equipped)The key can only be removed when the ignition The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notswitch is in the LOCK position. allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or If the engine fails to start using a registered keyON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF (for example, when interference is caused byposition, push the key in, then place the ignition another registered key, an automated toll roadswitch in LOCK position. device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedures: Starting and driving 5-11
    • BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. ● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely clear. cold weather or when restarting, depress 2. Automatic transmission: the accelerator pedal a little (approximately ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. the engine. Release the key and the accel- frequently as possible, or at least whenever erator pedal when the engine starts. you refuel. The shift selector cannot be moved out ● If the engine is very hard to start because ● Check that all windows and lights are clean. of the P (Park) position and into any of it is flooded, depress the accelerator the other gear positions if the ignition pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance switch is placed in the OFF position or and condition. Also check tires for proper Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After if the key is removed from the ignition cranking the engine, release the accel- inflation. switch. erator pedal. Crank the engine with your ● Check that all doors are closed. foot off the accelerator pedal by plac- The starter is designed not to operate if ● Position seat and adjust head restraint and ing the ignition in the START position. the shift selector is in any of the driving headrests (if so equipped). Release the key when the engine starts. If positions. the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Manual transmission: the above procedure. ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De- do likewise. CAUTION press the clutch pedal to the floor while ● Check the operation of warning lights when cranking the engine. Do not operate the starter for more than the ignition switch is placed in the ON ᭺D 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does The starter is designed not to operate not start, turn the key off and wait 10 position. See “Warning/indicator lights and unless the clutch pedal is fully de- audible reminders” in the “Instruments and seconds before cranking again, otherwise pressed. the starter could be damaged. controls” section of this manual. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- accelerator pedal by placing the ignition onds after starting. Do not race the engine switch in the START position. Release the while warming it up. Drive at moderate key when the engine starts. If the engine speed for a short distance first, especially in starts, but fails to run, repeat the above cold weather. procedure.5-12 Starting and driving
    • DRIVING THE VEHICLEAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximumequipped) power and smooth operation. WARNING The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages.● Do not depress the accelerator pedal Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- performance and driving enjoyment. tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until Starting the vehicle shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the have an accident. foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P (Park) position.● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and reverse gear before the engine has move the shift selector into a driving gear. LSD0151 warmed up. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start To move the shift selector:● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) the vehicle in motion. : Push the button while depressing the while the vehicle is moving. This could The automatic transmission is designed so brake pedal cause an accident. the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive : Push the button to shift CAUTION position while the ignition switch is in the : Shift without depressing brake pedal● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill ON position. grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- The shift selector cannot be moved out of Shifting pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot the P (Park) position and into any of the After starting the engine, fully depress the brake brake should be used for this purpose. other gear positions if the ignition switch is pedal and move the shift selector out of the P● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. (Park) position. roads. This may cause a loss of control. Starting and driving 5-13
    • parking brake first, then move the shift selector Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds WARNING into the P (Park) position. over the following and do not exceed the follow-Apply the parking brake if the shift selec- ing speeds in the 3 position.tor is in any position while the engine is R (Reverse):not running. Failure to do so could cause 2WD:the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll CAUTION 99 MPH (160 km/h)away and result in serious personal injury To prevent transmission damage, use theor property damage. P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when 4H: the vehicle is completely stopped. 99 MPH (160 km/h)If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACCposition for any reason while the vehicle is in N Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make 4LO:(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition sure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK position 37 MPH (60 km/h) selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakeand the key cannot be removed from the ignition pedal must be depressed to move the shift 2 (Second gear):switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anyposition, then the ignition switch can be placed in Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak- drive position to R (Reverse).LOCK. ing on downhill grades. N (Neutral):P (Park): Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The over the following and do not exceed the follow- CAUTION engine can be started in this position. You may ing speeds in the 2 position.To prevent transmission damage, use the shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine 2WD:P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when while the vehicle is moving.the vehicle is completely stopped. 62 MPH (100 km/h) D (Drive):Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the 4H: Use this position for all normal forward driving.vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. 62 MPH (100 km/h)Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. 3 (Third gear):The brake pedal should be depressed to 4LO: Use this position for driving up and down longmove the shift selector from N (Neutral) or slopes where engine braking would be advanta- 21 MPH (35 km/h)any drive position to P (Park). Apply the geous.parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the5-14 Starting and driving
    • 1 (Low gear): To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill tion and remove the key.grades. 2. Apply the parking brake.Do not downshift into the 1 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow- 3. Remove the shift lock release cover asing speeds in the 1 position. shown. 2WD: 4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down. 37 MPH (60 km/h) 5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) 4H: position while holding down the shift lock 37 MPH (60 km/h) LSD0141 release. 4LO: Shift lock release 6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position 12 MPH (20 km/h) If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may to unlock the steering wheel (for models with not be moved from the P (Park) position even with a steering lock mechanism). the brake pedal depressed. 7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de- To move the shift selector, release the shift lock. sired location. The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral). If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P However, the steering wheel will be locked un- (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- matic transmission system as soon as possible. tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. Starting and driving 5-15
    • WARNING OFF: For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking is nec-If the shift selector cannot be moved from essary push the Overdrive switchthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed, once. The O/D OFF indicator lightthe stop lights may not work. Malfunction- in the instrument panel comes on ating stop lights could cause an accident this time.injuring yourself and others. When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftAccelerator downshift shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of— in D position — Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheFor passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- comes on at this time.sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed. LSD0142 When driving conditions change, depress the Overdrive switch Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on. Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis- Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex- sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON. tended periods of time with the Overdrive off. This reduces fuel economy. ON: With the engine running and the shift selector in the D (Drive) position, the transmission upshifts into Overdrive as vehicle speed increases. Overdrive does not engage until the engine has reached operating temperature.5-16 Starting and driving
    • MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped) WARNING● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.● Do not over-rev the engine when shift- ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage. CAUTION● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch WSD0154 LSD0148 damage. 5 - speed 6 - speed● Fully depress the clutch pedal before Shifting To back up depress the shift selector and then shifting to help prevent transmission move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping damage. To change gears, or when upshifting or down- the vehicle completely. shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into● Stop your vehicle completely before the appropriate gear, then release the clutch On the 5-speed manual transmission model, you shifting into R (Reverse). slowly and smoothly. cannot shift directly from the 5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then in to R● When the vehicle is stopped with the To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the (Reverse) after stopping the vehicle completely. engine running (for example, at a stop clutch pedal before operating the shift selector. If light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R the clutch pedal with the foot brake transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. (Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), then applied. Transmission damage could occur. release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First). Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-17
    • If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see Suggested maximum speed in each 2–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)“Transfer case shifting procedures” later in this gear GEAR MPH (km/h)section. Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not 1st 35 (56)Suggested upshift speeds running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. 2nd 60 (97)The following are suggested vehicle speeds for 3rd 87 (141) Do not exceed the maximum suggested speedshifting into a higher gear. These suggestions (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, 4th —relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. use the highest gear suggested for that speed. 5th —Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road Always observe posted speed limits, and drive 4–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)conditions, the weather and individual driving according to the road conditions, which will en-habits. sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine 2H/4H position ● For QR25DE two-wheel drive models: when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause GEAR MPH (km/h) engine damage or loss of vehicle control. 1st 33 (54) GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) Allowable maximum speed in each gear: 2nd 58 (93) 1st to 2nd 11 (17) 2–wheel drive models (QR25DE engine) 3rd 84 (135) 2nd to 3rd 15 (24) 4th — 3rd to 4th 24 (38) GEAR MPH (km/h) 5th — 4th to 5th 35 (56) 1st 34 (54) 6th — ● For VQ40DE two-wheel drive models and 2nd 58 (94) 4L position four-wheel drive models (2H and 4H posi- 3rd 89 (144) GEAR MPH (km/h) tion): 4th — 1st 12 (20) GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 5th — 2nd 22 (35) 1st to 2nd 11 (17) 3rd 32 (51) 2nd to 3rd 17 (27) 4th 43 (70) 3rd to 4th 25 (40) 5th 55 (89) 4th to 5th 32 (51) 6th — 5th to 6th 45 (72)5-18 Starting and driving
    • PARKING BRAKE 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning WARNING light goes out.● Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.● Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.● Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.● Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident. LSD0150 To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up ᭺. A To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion. 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, push the button ᭺ and lower the B lever completely . Starting and driving 5-19
    • CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped) ● The SET indicator light may blink when the CAUTION cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, On manual transmission models, do not COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located shift into N (Neutral) without depressing on the steering wheel). To properly set the the clutch pedal when the cruise control is cruise control system, use the following pro- set. Should this occur, depress the clutch cedures. pedal and turn the main switch off imme- diately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage. WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS under the following conditions: The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- ● When it is not possible to keep the tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without vehicle at a set speed. keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. WSD0153 ● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in To turn on the cruise control, push the main1. ACCEL/RES switch speed. switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-2. COAST/SET switch ● On winding or hilly roads. ment panel comes on.3. ON/OFF switch4. CANCEL switch ● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchPRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE ● In very windy areas. and release it. The SET indicator light in theCONTROL Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the control and result in an accident. accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator speed. light in the instrument panel then blinks to ● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- warn the driver. celerator pedal. When you release the ● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously cruise control main switch off and have the set speed. system checked by a NISSAN dealer.5-20 Starting and driving
    • BREAK-IN SCHEDULE ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one CAUTION when going up or down steep hills. If this of the following three methods. happens, drive without the cruise control. During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the follow these recommendations to obtainTo cancel the preset speed, use one of the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and maximum engine performance and en-following three methods. release the COAST/SET switch. sure the future reliability and economy of ● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator ● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. your new vehicle. Failure to follow these light in the instrument panel goes out. When the vehicle attains the speed you de- recommendations may result in short- sire, release the switch. ened engine life and reduced engine ● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light performance. goes out. ● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in- ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant ● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the indicator light and SET indicator light in the engine over 4,000 rpm. instrument panel go out. To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: ● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- ● Avoid quick starts. hicle attains the desired speed, push the ● you depress the brake or clutch pedal while ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. COAST/SET switch and release it. pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles switch. The preset speed is deleted from ● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts memory. lease the switch when the vehicle slows to could be damaged. the desired speed. ● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. ● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed de- ● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). mission), or move the shift selector to N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). Starting and driving 5-21
    • INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) ● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain ● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more WARNING cruising speeds with a constant accelerator economical to use the air conditioner and position. leave the windows closed to reduce drag. ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- tempt to raise two wheels off the ● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. ● For vehicles equipped with , use 4H ground and shift the transmission to Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy. or 4L position only when necessary. Four- any drive or reverse position with the wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy. engine running. Doing so may result in ● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- hicle movement which could result in hicles. serious vehicle damage or personal ● Use a proper gear range which suits road injury. conditions. On level roads, shift into high ● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped gear as soon as possible. vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer ● Avoid unnecessary engine idling. (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or ● Keep your engine tuned up. similar equipment even if the other two ● Follow the recommended periodic mainte- wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel nance schedule. that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- before it is placed on a dynamometer. sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear Using the wrong test equipment may and lowers fuel economy. result in drivetrain damage or unex- pected vehicle movement which could ● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. result in serious vehicle damage or per- Improper alignment increases tire wear and sonal injury. lowers fuel economy. ● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.5-22 Starting and driving
    • CAUTION TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO PROCEDURES position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear desired drive mode according to the driving con- and increased fuel consumption. ditions. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for automatic transmission vehicles, stop the ve- hicle and shift the shift selector to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for manual trans- mission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N position with the clutch pedal de- pressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.● If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Starting and driving 5-23
    • 2WD or 4WD shift procedure: 4WD Shift Indicator Light Wheels Driven Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure Switch Position 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position Move the 4WD switch. For driving on dry, paved 2WD <—> 4H Rear wheels 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position en- roads (Economy drive) gaged. 2WD For driving on rocky, sandy 4 wheels or snow-covered roads 4H Neutral Neutral disengages the 1. Stop the vehicle. automatic transmission 2. For automatic transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector mechanical parking lock, to the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed. which will allow the vehicle For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to *1 to roll. Do not leave the the (N) position with the clutch depressed. May blink transfer shift position in 3. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the Neutral.*2 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal de- pressed. For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the 4LO 4WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal depressed. 4 wheels For use when maximum THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H power and traction is re- AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST quired (for example: on STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL Illuminated steep grades or rocky, AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL FOR AU- sandy, muddy roads) TOMATIC TRANSMISSION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANS- MISSION VEHICLES YOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT SELEC- TOR TO NEUTRAL. *3*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position. - If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition. 1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ЉOFFЉ.5-24 Starting and driving
    • 2. Start the engine. - Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 3. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position. For manual transmission vehicles, move the shift selector to Neutral position. 4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode. - Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” later in this section. Starting and driving 5-25
    • The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to ● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink- ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the ing and remain illuminated or turn off tween 2WD and 4H) while driving ondriving conditions. There are three types of drive before shifting the transmission into steep downhill grades. Use the enginemodes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. gear. If the shift selector is shifted from brake and low automatic transmissionThe 4WD shift switch electronically controls the the (N) position to any other gear when gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmis-transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the sion (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine vehicle may move unexpectedly. braking.move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchTo change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle CAUTION (between 2WD and 4H) with the rearMUST be stationary, shift the shift selector wheels spinning.to Neutral (N), and for automatic transmis- ● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving. ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadssion vehicles depress the brake pedal orfor manual transmission vehicles depress ● The 4H position provides greater trac- in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on drythe clutch pedal. The switch must be de- tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causepressed and turned when changing into or cause increased fuel consumption and unnecessary noise and tire wear. higher oil temperatures, and could NISSAN recommends driving in theout of 4LO. damage drivetrain components. 2WD position under these conditions. WARNING Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is ● The 4WD transfer case may not be not recommended shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am- ● The 4LO position provides maximum bient temperatures and the transfer● When parking, apply the parking brake power and traction. Avoid raising ve- 4LO position indicator light may blink before stopping the engine and make hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- even when the 4WD shift switch is sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is mum speed is approximately 31 MPH shifted. After driving for a while you can on and the ATP warning light goes off. (50 km/h). change the 4WD transfer case between Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- 4H and 4LO. edly move even if the automatic trans- ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD mission is in the P position. shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. When driving on rough roads, Do not move the 4WD shift switch when ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. making a turn or reversing. ● Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions.5-26 Starting and driving
    • When the vehicle is stuck, ● When the vehicle is stopped after mak- ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. after the shift selector is shifted to N or ● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential P. This occurs because the transfer (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the clutch is released and not because of a switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and malfunction. apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle. ● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the CAUTION vehicle back and forth between reverse and ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD drive gears. shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. ● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place Do not move the 4WD shift switch when stones or wooden blocks under the tires. making a turn or reversing. Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while chains may be effective. LSD0145 driving on steep downhill grades. Use 4WD shift switch operations the engine brake and low automatic CAUTION transmission gears (D1 or D2) or● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires ● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd will sink deep into the mud, making it 2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on gear) for engine braking. difficult to free the vehicle. driving conditions. ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch● Avoid shifting gears with the engine ● If the 4WD shift switch is operated with the rear wheels spinning. running at high speeds as this may while making a turn, accelerating or ● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in cause malfunction. decelerating or if the key switch is the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi- vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100 tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not km/h). Failure to do so can damage the abnormal. 4WD system. ● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving. Starting and driving 5-27
    • 4WD shift indicator light ● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD indicator light goes out. CAUTION If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunc- tioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on, have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer. LSD0147 4WD warning light The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the odometer display. Comes on or blinks The light should turn off within 1 second after Warning light when: turning the ignition switch to the ON position. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- There is a malfunc- cator light will illuminate the position selected by Comes on tion in the 4–wheel the 4WD shift switch. drive system ● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to The difference in the other. When the shifting is com- Blinks slowly wheel rotation is large pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light will come on. The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.5-28 Starting and driving
    • The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni- ● When the warning light comes on, the – in the 4LO position for manual trans-tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after 2WD mode may be engaged even if the mission vehicles, stop the vehiclethe engine is started. 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially and shift the shift selector to the NIf any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system careful when driving. If corresponding position with the clutch pedal de-when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD pressed and shift the 4WD shiftwill either remain illuminated or blink. mode will not be engaged even if the switch to 2WD. 4WD shift switch is shifted. ● If the warning light is still on after theIf the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO above operation, have your vehicleshift indicator light goes out. position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon asA large difference between the diameters of front ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO possible.and rear wheels will make the warning light blink may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear ● The transfer case may be damaged ifslowly (about once per two seconds). Change and increased fuel consumption. you continue driving with the warningthe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive If the 4WD warning light turns on when light blinking.fast. you are driving on dry hard surface roads: CAUTION – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift● If the warning light comes on or blinks switch to 2WD. slowly during operation, have your ve- – in the 4LO position for automatic hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as transmission vehicles, stop the ve- soon as possible. hicle and shift the shift selector to● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not the N position with the brake pedal recommended when the 4WD warning depressed and shift the 4WD shift light turns on. switch to 2WD. Starting and driving 5-29
    • ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)The E-Lock system can provide additional trac- WARNING CAUTIONtion and should only be used when a vehicle hasbecome or is becoming stuck. This system oper- ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON ● After using the E-Lock system, turn theates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive when driving on paved or hard-surfaced switch OFF to prevent possible damagewheels together, allowing them to turn at the roads. Turning the vehicle may result in to driveline components from extendedsame speed. The system is used when it is not the rear wheels slipping and result in an use.possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using accident and personal injury. After us- ● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds fasterthe 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles). ing the E-Lock system to free the ve- than 12 mph (20 km/h) when the system hicle, turn the system OFF. is engaged. Doing so could damageWhen added traction is required, activate the ● Use the E-Lock system only when free- drivetrain components.E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys- ● Do not turn on the E-lock system while before using the E-Lock system. Nevertem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls” the tires are spinning. Doing so could use the E-Lock system on a slipperysection. Once the system fully engages, the indi- damage drivetrain components. road surface such as snow or ice sur-cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON. face. Using the E-Lock system whenWhen the system is activated, both rear wheels driving in these road conditions maywill engage, providing added traction. cause unexpected movement of the ve- hicle during engine braking, accelerat-The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to ing or turning, which may result in anengage the system, and the system will only accident and serious personal injury.engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).Once the vehicle is free, the system should beturned OFF and driving resumed.The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabledand the ABS light illuminates when the E-Locksystem is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC lightilluminates when the E-Lock system is ON.5-30 Starting and driving
    • PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift selector in 1st gear. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. ● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ᭺ A WSD0050 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel WARNING Make sure the shift selector has been gently touches the curb. pushed as far forward as it can go and● Do not stop or park the vehicle over cannot be moved without depressing ● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ᭺ B flammable materials such as dry grass, the foot brake pedal. waste paper or rags. They may ignite Turn the wheels away from the curb and and cause a fire. ● Never leave the engine running while move the vehicle back until the curb side the vehicle is unattended. wheel gently touches the curb.● Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the ● Do not leave children unattended inside ● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO transmission placed into P (Park) for the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- CURB: ᭺ C automatic transmission models or in an tivate switches or controls. Unattended Turn the wheels toward the side of the road appropriate gear for manual transmis- children could become involved in seri- so the vehicle will move away from the cen- sion models. Failure to do so could ous accidents. ter of the road if it moves. cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. or roll away and result in an accident. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion and remove the key. Starting and driving 5-31
    • POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEMThe power assisted steering uses a hydraulic The brake system has two separate hydraulic WARNINGpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at 2 wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, beIf the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you careful when braking, accelerating orwill still have control of the vehicle. However, BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-much greater steering effort is needed, especially erating could cause the wheels to skidin sharp turns and at low speeds. Vacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident. WARNING The brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist forIf the engine is not running or is turned off vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will bewhile driving, the power assist for the greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder.steering will not work. Steering will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-harder to operate. tance will be longer. Wet brakes Using the brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicle driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking. brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to brakes from overheating, reduce speed and heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return downshift to a lower gear before going down a to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may speeds until the brakes function correctly. reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.5-32 Starting and driving
    • This procedure is described in the vehicle service – When installing a spare tire, make WARNINGmanual and can be performed by a NISSAN sure that it is the proper size and typedealer. as specified on the Tire and Loading Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so Information label. See “Tire and may result in increased stoppingANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM Loading Information label” in the distances.(ABS) “Technical and consumer informa- Self-test feature tion” section of this manual. WARNING The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric – For detailed information, see● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- nance and do-it-yourself” section of computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that vent accidents resulting from careless this manual. tests the system each time you start the engine or dangerous driving techniques. It can and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or help maintain vehicle control during The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake ber that stopping distances on slippery braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a surfaces will be longer than on normal The system detects the rotation speed at each malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the tances may also be longer on rough, vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The gravel or snow covered roads, or if you preventing each wheel from locking, the system brake system then operates normally, but without are using tire chains. Always maintain a helps the driver maintain steering control and anti-lock assistance. safe distance from the vehicle in front helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip- of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- pery surfaces. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the sible for safety. self-test or while driving, have the vehicle● Tire type and condition may also affect Using the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- Normal operation – When replacing tires, install the press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5 specified size of tires on all four ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road wheels. the vehicle to avoid obstacles. conditions. Starting and driving 5-33
    • ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) SYSTEM (if so equipped)When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are ● ABLS is a form of traction control using The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies sensors from the Anti-lock Brake System various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is (ABS) to transfer power from a slipping drive hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, thesimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You wheel to a wheel with more traction. The system will control braking and engine output tomay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a ABLS system applies braking to the slipping help keep the vehicle on its steered path.noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from wheel, which helps redirect power to an-the actuator when it is operating. This is normal other wheel. ● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. system is operating, the SLIP indicator in the ● On 4WD models the ABLS system operates instrument panel blinks.However, the pulsation may indicate that road in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode isconditions are hazardous and extra care is re- engaged, the ABLS system will operate for ● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOquired while driving. both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the the indicator light will come on and ABLS system operates on the drive axle the VDC system will be turned off. See only. “Transfer case shifting procedures” earlier in ● The ABLS system is always ON unless the this section. system detects brake pad overheating. If ● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi- high brake pad temperature is detected, it tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your will turn OFF, but normal brake function will speed and driving to these conditions. See continue. ABLS will function even when the “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic VDC system (if so equipped) is turned OFF. Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In- struments and controls” section. WARNING The ABLS system provides increased trac- If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- tion, but will not prevent accidents due to tion control system may be disabled and the abrupt steering operation or by careless SLIP and indicator lights will not turn off driving or dangerous driving practices. after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned Reduce vehicle speed and be especially to the ON position. Perform the following proce- careful when driving and cornering on dure to reset the system: slippery surfaces, and always drive carefully. ● Start the engine and set the steering wheel in the straight forward position.5-34 Starting and driving
    • ● Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph The computer has a built in diagnostic feature ● If brake related parts such as brake (15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes. that tests the system each time you start the pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- ● The VDC OFF indicator light should go off engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse dard equipment or are extremely dete- indicating the traction control system is op- at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control erational. may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in system may not operate properly and the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indi- ● If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn- indication of a malfunction. cator light may come on. ing the ignition off, you will need to restart the reset procedure. ● If engine related parts such as muffler WARNING are not standard equipment or are ex-If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min- ● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi- designed to help improve driving stabil- dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-nated in the instrument panel, have the Vehicle ity but does not prevent accidents due cator lights may illuminate.Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN to abrupt steering operation at highdealer. ● When driving on extremely inclined sur- speeds or by careless or dangerous faces such as higher banked corners,If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy- driving techniques. Reduce vehicle the Vehicle Dynamic Control systemnamic Control system off using the VDC OFF speed and be especially careful when may not operate properly and the VDCswitch, most VDC and Traction Control System driving and cornering on slippery sur- OFF indicator light may come on. Do(TCS) functions will be turned off. The SLIP faces and always drive carefully. not drive on these types of roads.indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ● When driving on an unstable surfaceABS will still operate with the VDC system off. If suspension parts such as shock ab- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator orWhen the VDC system is operating, you may feel sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control offa pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or bushings and wheels are not NISSAN indicator light may illuminate. This isvibration from under the hood. This is not a mal- approved for your vehicle or are ex- not a malfunction. Restart the enginefunction and indicates that the VDC system is tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy- after driving onto a stable surface.working properly. namic Control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect ve- hicle handling performance, and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on. Starting and driving 5-35
    • HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)● If wheels or tires other than the recom- centrate on steering while reducing the burden of WARNING mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy- brake and accelerator operation. namic Control system may not operate ● Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed ● When additional braking is required on properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con- steep downhill roads activate the hill de- trol off indicator light may come on. when driving on steep down hill grades. Always drive carefully and attentively scent control system by pushing the switch● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is when using the hill descent control sys- ON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the not a substitute for winter tires or tire tem and decelerate the vehicle speed “Instruments and controls” section. chains on a snow covered road. by depressing the brake pedal if neces- ● Once the system is activated the indicator sary. Be especially careful when driving light will remain on in the instrument panel, on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep see “Hill descent control system on indicator downhill roads. Failure to control ve- light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec- hicle speed may result in a loss of con- tion. trol of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the ● The hill descent control may not control system will stop operating temporarily. As soon the vehicle speed on a hill under all load as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the or road conditions. Always be prepared hill descent control system begins to function to depress the brake pedal to control again if the hill descent control operating condi- vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re- tions are fulfilled. sult in a collision or serious personal injury. For the best results, when descending steep downhill grades, the hill descent control switch The hill descent control system helps maintain should be ON and the shift selector in 2 (Second vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking. (25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill descent control is useful when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-5-36 Starting and driving
    • HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so COLD WEATHER DRIVINGequipped) WARNING The hill start assist system automatically keeps FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle● Never rely solely on the hill start assist from rolling backwards in the time it takes the To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- system to prevent the vehicle from mov- driver to release the brake pedal and apply the icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes ing backward on a hill. Always drive accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key carefully and attentively. Depress the hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so brake pedal when the vehicle is Hill start assist will operate automatically under equipped). stopped on a steep hill. Be especially the following conditions: careful when stopped on a hill on frozen ANTI-FREEZE ● The shift selector is shifted to a forward or or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the reverse gear. In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- vehicle from rolling backwards may re- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the sult in a loss of control of the vehicle ● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. and possible serious injury or death. by applying the brake. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the● The hill start assist system is not de- The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill manual. on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when start assist will stop operating completely. BATTERY the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Hill start assist will not operate when the shift Failure to do so may cause the vehicle selector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level If the battery is not fully charged during extremely to roll backwards and may result in a road. cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may collision or serious personal injury. freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked● The hill start assist may not prevent the regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this under all load or road conditions. Al- manual. ways be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. Starting and driving 5-37
    • DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. For details see ● Whatever the condition, drive with cau- “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it- tion. Accelerate and slow down withIf the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- yourself” section of this manual. care. If accelerating or downshifting toofreeze, drain the cooling system, including the fast, the drive wheels will lose evenengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT more traction.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the It is recommended that the following items be ● Allow more stopping distance under“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this carried in the vehicle during winter: these conditions. Braking should bemanual. ● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove started sooner than on dry pavement.TIRE EQUIPMENT ice and snow from the windows and wiper ● Allow greater following distances on 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to blades. slippery roads. provide superior performance on dry pave- ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). ment. However, the performance of these jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise tires will be substantially reduced in snowy clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ice is seen ahead, brake before reach- hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- ● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL voir tank. and avoid any sudden steering SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please maneuvers. consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE ● Do not use the cruise control on slip- size, speed rating and availability informa- pery roads. tion. WARNING ● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep snow tires may be used. However, some U.S. very cold snow or ice can be slick and clear of the exhaust pipe and from states and Canadian provinces prohibit their very hard to drive on. The vehicle will around your vehicle. use. Check local, state and provincial laws have much less traction or “grip” under before installing studded tires. these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted orSkid and traction capabilities of studded sanded.snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.5-38 Starting and driving
    • ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater:equipped) 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block WARNING heater cord.● Do not use your engine block heater 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a with an ungrounded electrical system grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se- cord. riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault● Disconnect and properly store the en- Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110- gine block heater cord before starting volt AC (VAC) outlet. the engine. Damage to the cord could 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in result in an electrical shock and can for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside cause serious injury. temperatures, to properly warm the engine● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug engine block heater on. the extension cord into a Ground Fault 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop- Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded erly store the cord to keep it away from 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the moving parts. proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower. Starting and driving 5-39
    • MEMO5-40 Starting and driving
    • 6 In case of emergencyFirst aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14
    • FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)The first aid kit is located in the under-seat stor-age bins.To access the first aid kit: LCE0108 LCE0113 King cab model Crew cab model For King cab model, lift up the rear jump seat and For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat remove net to remove the first aid kit. Refer to and remove the net to remove the first aid kit. “Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the and supplemental restraint system” section ear- “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental lier in the manual. restraint system” section earlier in the manual.6-2 In case of emergency
    • FLAT TIRETIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ● Replacing tires with those not originallySYSTEM (TPMS) ● If the low tire pressure warning light specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure illuminates while driving, avoid suddenMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosolsure of all tires except the spare. When the low reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road tire sealant into the tires, as this maytire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of to a safe location and stop the vehicle cause a malfunction of the tire pressureyour tires is significantly under-inflated. If the as soon as possible. Driving with under- sensors.vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of CHANGING A FLAT TIRETPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire failure. Serious vehicle damage If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-tire pressure warning light. This system will acti- could occur and may lead to an acci-vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds low: dent and could result in serious per-above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forto “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind- Stopping the vehicle all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure toers” in the “Instruments and controls” section, the recommended COLD tire pressure 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andand “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- away from traffic.in the “Starting and driving” section. tion label to turn the low tire pressure 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking possible. brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel into P (Park). is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light 4. Turn off the engine. will flash for approximately 1 minute. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to The light will remain on after 1 minute. signal professional road assistance person- Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as nel that you need assistance. possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. In case of emergency 6-3
    • WARNING● Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto- matic transmission into P (Park).● Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance. WCE0044 LCE0109 Blocking wheels King Cab models Getting the spare tire and tools Place suitable blocks ᭺ at both the front and 1 back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire For King Cab models: ᭺ to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is 2 The tool storage compartment is located be- jacked up. tween the two rear jump seats. WARNING 1. Turn the knob from the lock to the unlock position and remove the lid from the tool Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle storage compartment. may move and result in personal injury. 2. Release the strap to remove the tool bag. 3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the stor- age location. 4. Remove the jack and jacking tools.6-4 In case of emergency
    • All models: 1. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle. 2. Find the oval-shaped opening under the middle of the tailgate. Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire. LCE0110 LCE0111King Cab models Crew Cab models For Crew Cab models: The tools and tool case are located behind the rear bench seat. 1. Fold the rear bench seat down. Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat down” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this manual. 2. Remove the jack ᭺ and jacking tools ᭺. 1 2 In case of emergency 6-5
    • 4. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, ● Never use blocks on or under the jack. reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tire from under ● Do not start or run the engine while the rear of the vehicle. vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true CAUTION for vehicles with limited slip differentials. Be sure to center the spare tire suspend- ing plate on the wheel and then lift the ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the spare tire. vehicle while it is on the jack. ● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off Jacking up vehicle and removing the the ground. It may cause the vehicle to